Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 268

05/08 CODE TECHNICAL REFERENCE

MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGIAL SYSTEMS

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205

File No. SME06002800


R060821C5100-TTEC
Ver00_2006-12
2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission
of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION. No patent liability is assumed, however, with respect to the use of the
information contained herein.
Introduction

The 05/08 Code Technical Reference lists the codes in adjustment mode 05 and setting mode 08 for
the e-STUDIO163/165/203/205. It addresses their purposes, specific descriptions and timing. This doc-
ument is intended to facilitate your understanding of the code functions and increase customer satisfac-
tion.

Precautions in Servicing
For the codes used by the service technician, the cautions mentioned in the Service Handbook must be
stringently followed. The adjustments must be performed by a qualified service technician who has
completed the service training course.

Warning
Please handle any confidential information included in this manual with appropriate care.
If you fail to do so, you may be punished according to law.

Manual Format:
The manual consists as follows.

Introduction Destination Explains the expression of destination in this


book.
How to read 05/08 code This code explains the written item and its con-
tent for each 05 and 08 code.
Code table by category Adjustment mode 05 and setting mode 08 are
listed individually on a code table by category.
This code table is convenient for searching a
desired code.
It is possible to jump from this table to the item in
the body of this book directly.
1. 05 Adjustment Code Explains each 05 adjustment code.
2. 08 Setting Code Explains each 08 setting code.

* 05/08 codes are basically explained in the numerical order. However, they are not always in an
order because several codes are provided for items that are described by function.

Destination:
The destinations described in this Technical Reference are as follows.

Notation Actual destination Reference


EUR ASD: Asia As a classification of destinations, when
AUD: Australia EUR is written, this signifies the entire desti-
CND: China nation except UC and JPN, unless other-
MJD: Europe wise written.
SAD/ASU: Saudi Arabia
KRD: Korea
ARD: Latin America
TWD: Taiwan
UC NAD: North America
JPN JPD/FJP: Japan
How to Read 05/08 Codes:
Following items are explained for each code.

[05 Adjustment Code]


Item Content
Code Number The number of a 05 adjustment code
Code Name The name of a code
Purpose Explains the purpose of the code.
Description Explains the adjustment content.
Codes are divided roughly into 2 categories.
1. Codes, which execute only adjustment.
2. Codes, which execute after selecting the adjustment value.
These codes contain the default and the adjustment acceptable value.
* For detailed adjustment procedures, refer to the Service Handbook [2.2.4 Adjustment
mode (05)].
Adjustment Timing Explains the adjustment timing.
Principle Explains the adjustment principle for the code that needs a specific explanation.
Caution Explains the caution.
Perform the adjustment after reading the caution.
Important information including adjustment conditions (which order of codes to perform
adjustment) is written in this section.

[08 Setting Code]


Item Content
Code Number The number of a 08 setting code
Code Name The name of a code
Purpose Explains the purpose of the code.
Description Explains the setting content.
Codes are divided roughly into 2 categories.
1. Codes, which execute only setting.
2. Codes, which execute after selecting the setting value.
These codes contain selectable options.
* For detailed setting procedures, refer to the Service Handbook [2.2.5 Setting mode
(08)].
Setting Timing Explains the setting timing.
Caution Explains the caution.
Perform the setting after reading the caution.
Important information including restrictions on settings is written in this section.
CONTENTS
e-STUDIO163/165/203/205

1. Code Table by Category.............................................................................................. 1-1


[05 Adjustment Code] .......................................................................................................... 1-1
[08 Setting Code] ................................................................................................................. 1-2
2. Code in Adjustment Mode 05 ..................................................................................... 2-1
List of 05 Adjustment Code.................................................................................................. 2-1
05-200/201 .......................................................................................................................... 2-3
05-205 ................................................................................................................................. 2-4
05-210 ................................................................................................................................. 2-5
05-220 to 222 ...................................................................................................................... 2-6
05-233 to 235 ...................................................................................................................... 2-7
05-247/270 .......................................................................................................................... 2-8
05-248 ................................................................................................................................. 2-9
05-280 ............................................................................................................................... 2-10
05-286 ............................................................................................................................... 2-11
05-305 ............................................................................................................................... 2-12
05-306 ............................................................................................................................... 2-13
05-310 ............................................................................................................................... 2-14
05-311 to 313 .................................................................................................................... 2-15
05-340 ............................................................................................................................... 2-16
05-350/351 ........................................................................................................................ 2-17
05-354/355 ........................................................................................................................ 2-18
05-357 ............................................................................................................................... 2-19
05-358 ............................................................................................................................... 2-20
05-359 ............................................................................................................................... 2-21
05-365/366 ........................................................................................................................ 2-22
05-401/405/1300 ............................................................................................................... 2-23
05-410/411/498 ................................................................................................................. 2-25
05-421/422 ........................................................................................................................ 2-27
05-424/425 ........................................................................................................................ 2-29
05-430 to 438 .................................................................................................................... 2-30
05-440 to 445 .................................................................................................................... 2-32
05-448 to 451/455/458/460 to 463/474 ............................................................................. 2-34
05-464 ............................................................................................................................... 2-37
05-466 ............................................................................................................................... 2-38
05-497 ............................................................................................................................... 2-39
05-501/503/504/700/710/714/845 to 847 .......................................................................... 2-41
05-505 to 507/701/715/719/850 to 852 ............................................................................. 2-42
05-508 to 510/702/720/724/855 to 857 ............................................................................. 2-43
05-512/514/515/725/729/860 to 862 ................................................................................. 2-44
05-532 to 534/835 to 837 .................................................................................................. 2-45
05-535 to 537/820 to 822 .................................................................................................. 2-46
05-570 to 572/693 to 695/825 to 827/830 to 832 .............................................................. 2-47
05-593 to 595 .................................................................................................................... 2-48
05-596 to 599 .................................................................................................................... 2-49
05-600 to 602/869 to 871 .................................................................................................. 2-50
05-609 ............................................................................................................................... 2-51
05-620 to 623/865 to 867 .................................................................................................. 2-52
05-648/654/655 ................................................................................................................. 2-53
05-664/665 ........................................................................................................................ 2-54
05-667/672/676/678 .......................................................................................................... 2-55

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS

1
3. Code in Setting Mode 08 ............................................................................................. 3-1
List of 08 Setting Code ........................................................................................................ 3-1
08-202 ................................................................................................................................. 3-6
08-203 ................................................................................................................................. 3-7
08-204 ................................................................................................................................. 3-8
08-205 ................................................................................................................................. 3-9
08-206 ............................................................................................................................... 3-10
08-209 ............................................................................................................................... 3-11
08-219 ............................................................................................................................... 3-12
08-224 to 228 .................................................................................................................... 3-13
08-229 to 242/244/245/337 to 341/471 ............................................................................. 3-14
08-246 ............................................................................................................................... 3-15
08-250 ............................................................................................................................... 3-16
08-251 ............................................................................................................................... 3-17
08-252 ............................................................................................................................... 3-18
08-253 ............................................................................................................................... 3-19
08-254 ............................................................................................................................... 3-21
08-255 ............................................................................................................................... 3-22
08-258 ............................................................................................................................... 3-23
08-260 ............................................................................................................................... 3-24
08-261 ............................................................................................................................... 3-25
08-263 ............................................................................................................................... 3-26
08-265 ............................................................................................................................... 3-27
08-266 ............................................................................................................................... 3-28
08-273 ............................................................................................................................... 3-29
08-274 ............................................................................................................................... 3-30
08-276 ............................................................................................................................... 3-31
08-281 ............................................................................................................................... 3-32
08-283 ............................................................................................................................... 3-33
08-284 ............................................................................................................................... 3-34
08-285 ............................................................................................................................... 3-35
08-286 ............................................................................................................................... 3-36
08-290 to 293/296 to 299/978/979 .................................................................................... 3-37
08-300 ............................................................................................................................... 3-40
08-305 to 308 .................................................................................................................... 3-41
08-312 to 314 .................................................................................................................... 3-43
08-315/316 ........................................................................................................................ 3-45
08-320 to 323 .................................................................................................................... 3-46
08-327 to 329 .................................................................................................................... 3-47
08-330/332 ........................................................................................................................ 3-48
08-335 ............................................................................................................................... 3-49
08-345 ............................................................................................................................... 3-50
08-346 ............................................................................................................................... 3-51
08-347/353 ........................................................................................................................ 3-52
08-348/349 ........................................................................................................................ 3-53
08-352 ............................................................................................................................... 3-54
08-356 to 358/360/370/372/374/1411 ............................................................................... 3-55
08-361/1150/1158/1172/1174/1182/1198/1200/1214/1224/1246/1250/1268/1298/1300/1312/
1314/1316/1320/1322/1328/1330/1332/1336 .............................................................. 3-56
08-381 ............................................................................................................................... 3-59
08-388/389 ........................................................................................................................ 3-60
08-400 ............................................................................................................................... 3-61
08-404/405 ........................................................................................................................ 3-62
08-407/411 ........................................................................................................................ 3-63
08-409/448 ........................................................................................................................ 3-64

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2
08-410/413/437/438/450 to 453/520/521 .......................................................................... 3-65
08-414 ............................................................................................................................... 3-66
08-424/425 ........................................................................................................................ 3-67
08-433/800/801/802/804/896 ............................................................................................ 3-68
08-439 to 441/523/526 ...................................................................................................... 3-69
08-455 ............................................................................................................................... 3-70
08-462 ............................................................................................................................... 3-71
08-463 ............................................................................................................................... 3-73
08-476/536/537/539 .......................................................................................................... 3-74
08-480 ............................................................................................................................... 3-76
08-481 ............................................................................................................................... 3-77
08-482 ............................................................................................................................... 3-78
08-483 ............................................................................................................................... 3-79
08-486 ............................................................................................................................... 3-80
08-502 ............................................................................................................................... 3-81
08-510 ............................................................................................................................... 3-82
08-515/516 ........................................................................................................................ 3-83
08-525/527/540/541 .......................................................................................................... 3-84
08-535 ............................................................................................................................... 3-86
08-538 ............................................................................................................................... 3-87
08-550 ............................................................................................................................... 3-88
08-603 ............................................................................................................................... 3-89
08-604 ............................................................................................................................... 3-90
08-611 ............................................................................................................................... 3-91
08-615 ............................................................................................................................... 3-92
08-617 ............................................................................................................................... 3-93
08-618 ............................................................................................................................... 3-94
08-631 ............................................................................................................................... 3-95
08-638 ............................................................................................................................... 3-96
08-641 ............................................................................................................................... 3-97
08-642 ............................................................................................................................... 3-98
08-649 ............................................................................................................................... 3-99
08-650 ............................................................................................................................. 3-101
08-655 ............................................................................................................................. 3-102
08-660/661 ...................................................................................................................... 3-103
08-666 ............................................................................................................................. 3-104
08-669 ............................................................................................................................. 3-105
08-672 ............................................................................................................................. 3-106
08-684/686 ...................................................................................................................... 3-107
08-685 ............................................................................................................................. 3-108
08-690 ............................................................................................................................. 3-109
08-691 ............................................................................................................................. 3-110
08-693 ............................................................................................................................. 3-111
08-695 ............................................................................................................................. 3-112
08-698 ............................................................................................................................. 3-113
08-699 ............................................................................................................................. 3-114
08-702/703/707/710/711/715 to 721/723/726 to 730/772/773/780 to 790/796 ............... 3-115
08-712/713/714 ............................................................................................................... 3-118
08-767 to 771/775 to 778 ................................................................................................ 3-119
08-805 to 809/814/818/819/826/864 to 867 .................................................................... 3-120
08-830/868/869 ............................................................................................................... 3-122
08-831/870/871 ............................................................................................................... 3-123
08-833 to 837/840/857 to 863 ......................................................................................... 3-124
08-838 ............................................................................................................................. 3-126
08-839 ............................................................................................................................. 3-127

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS

3
08-872/873/875 to 877/883/884 ...................................................................................... 3-128
08-886 ............................................................................................................................. 3-129
08-900/906 ...................................................................................................................... 3-130
08-905 ............................................................................................................................. 3-131
08-921/1951 .................................................................................................................... 3-132
08-922/923 ...................................................................................................................... 3-133
08-945 ............................................................................................................................. 3-134
08-947 ............................................................................................................................. 3-135
08-949 ............................................................................................................................. 3-136
08-970 ............................................................................................................................. 3-137
08-971 ............................................................................................................................. 3-138
08-973 ............................................................................................................................. 3-139
08-995 ............................................................................................................................. 3-140
08-1002 ........................................................................................................................... 3-141
08-1003 ........................................................................................................................... 3-142
08-1006 to 1010/1112 ..................................................................................................... 3-143
08-1011/1012 .................................................................................................................. 3-144
08-1013 ........................................................................................................................... 3-145
08-1014/1015/1103 to 1105 ............................................................................................ 3-146
08-1017 to 1019 .............................................................................................................. 3-147
08-1020 ........................................................................................................................... 3-148
08-1024/1025 .................................................................................................................. 3-149
08-1026 to 1029 .............................................................................................................. 3-150
08-1030 to 1032 .............................................................................................................. 3-151
08-1037 to 1045/1100 to 1102/1111 ............................................................................... 3-152
08-1046 to 1052/1097/1098 ............................................................................................ 3-154
08-1055 ........................................................................................................................... 3-155
08-1063/1065/1066/1069/1070/1099 .............................................................................. 3-156
08-1073/1074 .................................................................................................................. 3-158
08-1075 to 1077 .............................................................................................................. 3-159
08-1078 to 1088 .............................................................................................................. 3-160
08-1093 to 1096 .............................................................................................................. 3-162
08-1114 ........................................................................................................................... 3-163
08-1123 ........................................................................................................................... 3-164
08-1124 ........................................................................................................................... 3-165
08-1141 ........................................................................................................................... 3-166
08-1144 ........................................................................................................................... 3-167
08-1149 ........................................................................................................................... 3-168
08-1372 ........................................................................................................................... 3-169
08-1378 ........................................................................................................................... 3-170
08-1380 ........................................................................................................................... 3-171
08-1382 ........................................................................................................................... 3-172
08-1385/1386/1388 ......................................................................................................... 3-173
08-1410 ........................................................................................................................... 3-174
08-1428 ........................................................................................................................... 3-175
08-1440 ........................................................................................................................... 3-176
08-1447 ........................................................................................................................... 3-177
08-1448 ........................................................................................................................... 3-178
08-1449 ........................................................................................................................... 3-179
08-1450 ........................................................................................................................... 3-180
08-1451 ........................................................................................................................... 3-181
08-1628 ........................................................................................................................... 3-182
08-1882 ........................................................................................................................... 3-183
08-1913 ........................................................................................................................... 3-184
08-1952 to 1955 .............................................................................................................. 3-185

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4
08-1960 to 1979 .............................................................................................................. 3-186
08-1989 ........................................................................................................................... 3-187
08-1990 ........................................................................................................................... 3-188
08-1991 ........................................................................................................................... 3-189
08-1993 ........................................................................................................................... 3-190
08-1994 ........................................................................................................................... 3-191
08-1996 ........................................................................................................................... 3-192

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS

5
e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6
1. Code Table by Category

2. Code in Adjustment Mode 05

3. Code in Setting Mode 08

3
1. Code Table by Category
05 adjustment code and 08 setting code are provided by the category in the table. 1
There are category names only for 05 adjustment code and 08 setting code and common for both
codes.

[05 Adjustment Code]

Category Sub category 05 Adjustment Code Refer to page


ADF/RADF Aligning amount 05-354/355 2-18
Transporting 05-357 2-19
05-358 2-20
05-365/366 2-22
Image Image density 05-501/503/504/700/710/714/845 to 847 2-41
05-505 to 507/701/715/719/850 to 852 2-42
05-508 to 510/702/720/724/855 to 857 2-43
05-512/514/515/725/729/860 to 862 2-44
Printer density 05-667/672/676/678 2-55
Gamma table 05-609 2-51
Gamma balance 05-596 to 599 2-49
Gamma slope 05-593 to 595 2-48
Background adjust- 05-600 to 602/869 to 871 2-50
ment
Sharpness 05-620 to 623/865 to 867 2-52
Smudged/Faint text 05-648/654/655 2-53
Toner saving 05-664/665 2-54
Margin 05-430 to 438 2-30
Range correction 05-532 to 534/835 to 837 2-45
05-535 to 537/820 to 822 2-46
05-570 to 572/693 to 695/825 to 827/830 to 832 2-47
Paper feeding Paper pushing 05-466 2-38
amount
Aligning amount 05-448 to 451/455/458/460 to 463/474 2-34
Drive Exit motor 05-424/425 2-29
Main motor 05-421/422 2-27
Development Auto-toner 05-200/201 2-3
Developer bias 05-247/270 2-8
Temperature 05-205 2-4
Drum temperature 05-248 2-9
Scanner LED 05-311 to 313 2-15
Position 05-305 2-12
05-306 2-13
Carriage position 05-359 2-21
Shading position 05-350/351 2-17
Reproduction ratio 05-340 2-16
Peak 05-310 2-14
Charger Main charger bias 05-210 2-5
Transfer Transfer bias 05-220 to 222 2-6
Separation Separation bias 05-233 to 235 2-7
Process Toner recycle 05-280 2-10
Laser Write starting 05-410/411/498 2-25
05-440 to 445 2-32

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category

1-1
[08 Setting Code]

Category Sub category 08 Setting Code Refer to page


RADF Duplex copying 08-685 3-108
Counter Scan count 08-312 to 314 3-43
08-327 to 329 3-47
Double count 08-345 3-50
08-347/353 3-52
08-348/349 3-53
08-352 3-54
Total counter copy 08-388/389 3-60
Total number of 08-335 3-49
pages
Toner cartridge 08-1410 3-174
Transmitted/ 08-315/316 3-45
Received pages in 08-330/332 3-48
FAX
Number of output 08-305 to 308 3-41
pages 08-320 to 323 3-46
External counter 08-381 3-59
Paper source 08-356 to 358/360/370/372/374/1411 3-55
Media type 08-1385/1386/1388 3-173
Fuser unit 08-1372 3-169
08-1378 3-170
08-1380 3-171
08-1382 3-172
Scanner Control status 08-463 3-73
Transmitting E-mail 08-273 3-29
Memory full 08-1144 3-167
Data clear SRAM 08-1428 3-175
Network AppleTalk 08-1014/1015/1103 to 1105 3-146
NetWare 08-1026 to 1029 3-150
SNMP 08-1063/1065/1066/1069/1070/1099 3-156
DDNS 08-1020 3-148
DNS 08-1017 to 1019 3-147
POP3 08-1046 to 1052/1097/1098 3-154
E-mail 08-265 3-27
Enable server's 08-1989 3-187
08-1990 3-188
08-1991 3-189
08-1993 3-190
08-1994 3-191
08-1996 3-192
FTP 08-1055 3-155
HTTP 08-1030 to 1032 3-151
IP Conflict 08-1440 3-176
IP Filter 08-1960 to 1979 3-186
TCP/IP 08-1006 to 1010/1112 3-143
IPX/SPX 08-1011/1012 3-144
LPD 08-1075 to 1077 3-159
MAC address 08-1141 3-166
NCP 08-1013 3-145

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-2
Category Sub category 08 Setting Code Refer to page
Network NIC 08-1002 3-141
08-1003 3-142 1
NetWare printing 08-1093 to 1096 3-162
NT domain 08-1123 3-164
PCL 08-973 3-139
SMTP 08-1037 to 1045/1100 to 1102/1111 3-152
Raw TCP 08-1073/1074 3-158
Raw Port 08-945 3-134
Raw printing 08-290 to 293/296 to 299/978/979 3-37
Web data 08-260 3-24
WINS 08-1024/1025 3-149
Internet FAX 08-266 3-28
08-274 3-30
08-1114 3-163
Workgroup name 08-1124 3-165
Automatic transfer 08-660/661 3-103
Version FROM 08-921/1951 3-132
System/PFC 08-900/906 3-130
Controller ROM / 08-1952 to 1955 3-185
Scan ROM
Function table data 08-922/923 3-133
/ language data
Fax Automatic transfer 08-510 3-82
Image processing LED flashing 08-1913 3-184
Auto-toner 08-455 3-70
Toner recycle 08-838 3-126
Drum life correction 08-1628 3-182
Temperature/ 08-839 3-127
Humidity
Maintenance FSMS 08-258 3-23
RDMS 08-702/703/707/710/711/715 to 721/723/726 to 3-115
730/772/773/780 to 790/796
PM 08-251 3-17
08-252 3-18
08-361/1150/1158/1172/1174/1182/1198/1200/ 3-56
1214/1224/1246/1250/1268/1298/1300/1312/
1314/1316/1320/1322/1328/1330/1332/1336
Error history 08-253 3-19
Telephone number 08-250 3-16
Service notification 08-767 to 771/775 to 778 3-119
Equipment number 08-995 3-140
Laser Polygonal motor 08-483 3-79
08-486 3-80
Laser power 08-872/873/875 to 877/883/884 3-128
Image Error diffusion / 08-502 3-81
dither
Default setting 08-538 3-87
08-550 3-88

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category

1-3
Category Sub category 08 Setting Code Refer to page
Paper feeding Change of paper 08-481 3-77
source
Retry 08-482 3-78
Paper feeding 08-254 3-21
08-255 3-22
Default setting 08-480 3-76
Paper exit 08-698 3-113
08-699 3-114
Paper size 08-224 to 228 3-13
Paper dimension 08-229 to 242/244/245/337 to 341/471 3-14
Development Auto-toner[ 08-414 3-66
Developer bias 08-833 to 837/840/857 to 863 3-124
User interface X in 1 08-650 3-101
Custom mode 08-631 3-95
Copy volume 08-300 3-40
Job clear 08-246 3-15
Energy saving 08-970 3-137
mode
Sorting 08-641 3-97
08-649 3-99
Timer 08-204 3-8
08-205 3-9
08-206 3-10
Template 08-691 3-110
File 08-209 3-11
08-219 3-12
Book type 08-611 3-91
External counter 08-202 3-6
Administrator 08-263 3-26
Default setting 08-276 3-31
08-281 3-32
08-283 3-33
08-284 3-34
08-285 3-35
08-286 3-36
08-603 3-89
08-604 3-90
08-618 3-94
08-642 3-98
Department man- 08-617 3-93
agement
Paper size 08-261 3-25

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-4
Category Sub category 08 Setting Code Refer to page
General Enhanced bold 08-1149 3-168
All clear 08-669 3-105 1
Reset 08-655 3-102
Database 08-684/686 3-107
Toner cartridge 08-695 3-112
check
Nearly empty 08-971 3-138
Partition 08-666 3-104
Page setting 08-949 3-136
Memory 08-615 3-92
Equipment adjust- 08-203 3-7
ment mode
Initialization 08-690 3-109
08-693 3-111
08-947 3-135
08-1882 3-183
Time differences 08-638 3-96
Restriction to 250 08-712/713/714 3-118
sheets exiting
Department man- 08-672 3-106
agement
Main charger bias Main charger bias 08-805 to 809/814/818/819/826/864 to 867 3-120
Fuser Pre-running 08-439 to 441/523/526 3-69
Temperature 08-404/405 3-62
08-407/411 3-63
08-409/448 3-64
08-410/413/437/438/450 to 453/520/521 3-65
08-424/425 3-67
08-433/800/801/802/804/896 3-68
08-476/536/537/539 3-74
08-515/516 3-83
08-525/527/540/541 3-84
08-535 3-86
Status counter 08-400 3-61
Transfer bias Transfer bias 08-830/868/869 3-122
SEparation bias Separation bias 08-831/870/871 3-123

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category

1-5
e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-6
2. Code in Adjustment Mode 05

List of 05 Adjustment Code

Code Content Page


05-200/201 Automatic Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor 2-3
05-205 Developer Bias Output Adjustment 2-4 2
05-210 Main Charger Grid Bias Output Adjustment 2-5
05-220 to 222 Transfer DC Output Adjustment 2-6
05-233 to 235 Separation DC Output Adjustment 2-7
05-247/270 Temperature/Humidity Sensor Temperature/ 2-8
Humidity Display
05-248 Drum Thermistor Temperature Display 2-9
05-280 Enforced Performing of Toner Recycle Idle 2-10
05-286 Laser Power Adjustment 2-11
05-305 Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Secondary 2-12
Scanning Direction
05-306 Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Primary 2-13
Scanning Direction
05-310 Forced Performing of Peak Detection 2-14
05-311 to 313 R / B / YG-LED Current Actual Value Setting 2-15
05-340 Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Scanner Sec- 2-16
ondary Scanning
05-350/351 Shading Position Adjustment 2-17
05-354/355 ADF/RADF Paper Aligning Amount Adjustment 2-18
05-357 Fine Adjustment of ADF/RADF Transport Speed 2-19
05-358 ADF/RADF Side Deviation Adjustment 2-20
05-359 CIS Unit Position Adjustment during Scanning 2-21
from ADF/RADF
05-365/366 Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Primary 2-22
Scanning Direction (When the ADF/RADF is
Used)
05-401/405/1300 Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Primary Scan- 2-23
ning Direction (Fine Adjustment of Polygonal
Motor Rotation Speed)
05-410/411/498 Adjustment of Primary Scanning Laser Writing 2-25
Start Position
05-421/422 Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Secondary 2-27
Scanning Direction (Fine Adjustment of Main
Motor Rotation Speed)
05-424/425 Fine Adjustment of Exit Motor Rotation Speed 2-29
05-430 to 438 Margin Adjustment 2-30
05-440 to 445 Adjustment of Secondary Scanning Laser Writing 2-32
Start Position
05-448 to 451/455/458/460 to 463/474 Aligning Amount Adjustment 2-34
05-464 Aligning Amount Adjustment (Envelope) 2-37
05-466 Adjustment of Pushing Amount from Behind 2-38
05-497 Adjustment of Drawer Sideways Deviation 2-39
05-501/503/504/700/710/714/845 to 847 Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjust- 2-41
ment (Center Setting) (Copy/FAX/Scanner Func-
tion)
05-505 to 507/701/715/719/850 to 852 Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjust- 2-42
ment (Lighter Setting) (Copy/FAX/Scanner Func-
tion)

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2-1
Code Content Page
05-508 to 510/702/720/724/855 to 857 Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjust- 2-43
ment (Darker Setting) (Copy/FAX/Scanner Func-
tion)
05-512/514/515/725/729/860 to 862 Density Adjustment "Automatic Density" Fine 2-44
Adjustment (Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)
05-532 to 534/835 to 837 Range Correction Background Peak Adjustment 2-45
(Copy/Scanner Function)
05-535 to 537/820 to 822 Range Correction Text Peak Adjustment (Copy/ 2-46
Scanner Function)
05-570 to 572/693 to 695/825 to 827/830 to 832 Range Correction (Copy/Scan Function) 2-47
05-593 to 595 Gamma Data Slope Correction (Copy Function) 2-48
05-596 to 599 Gamma Balance Adjustment (Printer Function) 2-49
05-600 to 602/869 to 871 Background Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function) 2-50
05-609 Switching of Gamma Correction Table (Copy/FAX/ 2-51
Scanner Function)
05-620 to 623/865 to 867 Sharpness Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function) 2-52
05-648/654/655 Adjustment of Smudged/Faint Text (Copy/Printer 2-53
Function)
05-664/665 Upper Limit in Toner Saving Mode (Printer Func- 2-54
tion)
05-667/672/676/678 Adjustment of Image Density (Copy/Printer/FAX 2-55
Function)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-2
05-200/201

Automatic Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor

Purpose
When code 05-200 is performed, it automatically corrects the sensitivity of the auto-toner sensor. This
allows the toner density in the developer material to be measured accurately. Code 05-201 is used to 2
adjust the automatic adjustment value acquired from code 05-200.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
05-200 Automatic adjustment of auto-toner sensor
05-201 Automatic adjustment output value correction of auto-toner sensor

Description
When code 05-200 is performed, the sensitivity of the auto-toner sensor is automatically adjusted. This
automatically adjusts the output voltage of the sensor so that the toner density in the developer material
can be detected appropriately. The adjustment requires approximately two minutes.
When the value displayed on the control panel is not within the range of 232 to 248 (the auto-toner sen-
sor output is 2.32 to 2.48) after code 05-200 is performed, a value must be entered within the specified
value, by using the [ZOOM] ([25%] or [200%]) button for the e-STUDIO163, or the [Up] or [Down] but-
ton for the e-STUDIO165/205 on the control panel.
For further information, refer to 3.1 [Adjustment of Auto-toner Sensor] in the Service Handbook.

By adjusting code 05-201, the automatic adjustment value of the auto-toner sensor acquired from per-
forming code 05-200 can be corrected. As the set value is increased, the toner density in the developer
material and the printing density become higher. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the
toner density in the developer material and the printing density become lower.

05-201:
* Default: 141
* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum sensor output, 255: Maximum sensor output)

Adjustment Timing
Use these codes when replacing the developer material.

Caution
Perform this adjustment with the developer unit filled with only the developer material (with no toner
cartridge loaded, as well as no toner left in the cleaner unit). The equipment adopts the toner recycle
system. Therefore, when recycled toner left in the cleaner unit is transferred, proper adjustment can-
not be performed.)
Adjustment of the toner density in the toner developer material should usually be performed by
"Toner density correction (08-414)" instead of code 05-201.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2-3
05-205

Developer Bias Output Adjustment

Purpose
When the high-voltage transformer is replaced, the condition of toner amount adhered onto the photo-
conductive drum changes because the transformer characteristics vary. Therefore, when replacing the
high-voltage transformer, it is necessary to adjust the developer bias output with this code.
When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the developer bias output adjustment and the following
adjustments must be performed at the same time.
Main charger grid bias output adjustment (05-210)
Transfer DC output adjustment (05-220 to 222)
Separation DC output adjustment (05-233 to 235)

Description
When the set value is changed, the negative DC voltage of the developer bias, which is output from the
high-voltage transformer, is reset. As the set value is increased, the developer bias output voltage
becomes higher (or more negative) and the amount of toner attracted from the developer sleeve (mag-
netic roller) onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is increased. This results in the higher
density of copy outputs. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the developer bias output
voltage becomes lower and the amount of toner attracted onto the latent image, which is formed on the
drum, is decreased. This results in the lower density of copy outputs.
For further information, refer to 3.6 [Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer] in the Service Handbook.

* Default: 05-220: 165, 05-221: 179, 05-222: 126


* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum density, 255: Maximum density)

Adjustment Timing
When replacing the high-voltage transformer
If an avatar phenomenon occurs
If poor transfer occurs

Caution
Perform this adjustment with the process unit (cleaner and developer) being removed.
The digital tester, high-voltage transformer adjustment jig, and cover open switch release jig for ser-
vice are required to adjust these codes.
Decrease the transfer DC output value, if the avatar phenomenon occurs at the halftone area. Note
that when the transfer DC output value is decreased too much, poor transfer may occur.
Increase the transfer DC output value, if poor transfer occurs regardless of the charger wire being
soiled. Note that the avatar phenomenon occurs when the transfer DC output is increased too much.
Therefore, use thick paper mode to use thick paper.
By using the following codes, the transfer DC output values set by codes 05-220 to 222 are cor-
rected to choose the appropriate printing condition.
- Transfer DC output correction value when duplex printing (08-491 to 493)
- Transfer DC correction (08-830/868/869)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-4
05-210

Main Charger Grid Bias Output Adjustment

Purpose
This code is used to adjust the negative DC voltage of the main charger grid bias output from the high
voltage transformer. 2
Description
When the set value is changed, the negative DC voltage of the main charger grid bias, which is output
from the high-voltage transformer, is reset. As the set value is increased, the main charger grid voltage
becomes higher (or more negative) and the main charger voltage potential on the drum surface
becomes higher (or more negative). Then the amount of toner attracted onto the latent image, which is
formed on the drum, is decreased. This results in the lower density of copy outputs. On the other hand,
as the set value is decreased, the main charger grid voltage becomes lower and the main charger volt-
age potential on the drum surface becomes lower. Then the amount of toner attracted onto the latent
image, which is formed on the drum, is increased. This results in the higher density of copy outputs.
For further information, refer to 3.6 [Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer] in the Service Handbook.

* Default: 78
* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum density, 255: Maximum density)

Adjustment Timing
Use this code when replacing the high-voltage transformer.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.
Perform this adjustment with the process unit (cleaner and developer) being removed.
The digital tester, high-voltage transformer adjustment jig, and cover open switch release jig for ser-
vice are required to adjust this code.
By using "Main charger bias correction (08-805 to 809/826/864 to 867), the main charger grid bias
output value set by code 05-210 is corrected by operation mode and original mode so that the opti-
mal printing density can be set.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2-5
05-220 to 222

Transfer DC Output Adjustment

Purpose
When the high-voltage transformer is replaced, the toner transfer condition from the drum to paper
changes because the transformer characteristics vary. Therefore, when replacing the high-voltage
transformer, it is necessary to adjust the transfer DC output with these codes. The adjustment is applied
each to the leading edge, center and trailing edge of the paper. When replacing the high-voltage trans-
former, the transfer DC output adjustment and the following adjustments must be performed at the
same time.
Developer bias output adjustment (05-205)
Main charger grid bias output adjustment (05-210)
Separation DC output adjustment (05-233 to 235)

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
05-220 Transfer DC output adjustment (H), range at approx. 11 mm from the leading edge of
paper
05-221 Transfer DC output adjustment (C), center of paper
05-222 Transfer DC output adjustment (L), range at approx. 5 mm from the trailing edge of paper

Description
As the set value is increased, the transfer current becomes higher (or more positive) and the main
charger voltage potential of the paper surface becomes higher (or more positive). The amount of toner
transferred from the drum onto the paper is increased and the printing density becomes higher. On the
other hand, as the set value is decreased, the transfer current becomes lower. The amount of toner
transferred from the drum onto the paper is decreased and the printing density becomes lower.
For further information, refer to 3.6 [Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer] in the Service Handbook.

* Default: 05-220: 128, 05-221: 141, 05-222: 108


* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum density, 255: Maximum density)

Adjustment Timing
When replacing the high-voltage transformer.
When an avatar is seen.
When poor transfer occurs.

Caution
Perform this adjustment with the process unit (cleaner and developer) being removed.
A digital tester and a high-voltage transformer adjustment jig are required.
Decrease the transfer DC output value when an avatar is seen at the halftone area. Note that when
the transfer DC output value is decreased too much, poor transfer could occur.
Increase the transfer DC output value when poor transfer occurs regardless of the charger wire
being soiled. Note that the avatar phenomenon occurs when the transfer DC output is increased too
much. Therefore, when using thick paper, thick paper mode should be used.
By using the following setting codes, the transfer DC output values set by these codes are corrected
to choose the appropriate printing condition.
- Transfer DC output correction value when duplex printing (08-491 to 493)
- Transfer DC correction (08-830/868/869)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-6
05-233 to 235

Separation DC Output Adjustment

Purpose
When the high-voltage transformer is replaced, the DC voltage value to separate paper from the drum
changes because the transformer characteristics vary. Therefore, when replacing the high-voltage 2
transformer, it is necessary to adjust the separation DC output by using these codes. The adjustment is
applied each to the leading edge, center and trailing edge of the paper. When replacing the high-volt-
age transformer, the separation DC output adjustment and the following adjustments must be per-
formed at the same time.
Developer bias output adjustment (05-205)
Main charger grid bias output adjustment (05-210)
Transfer DC output adjustment (05-220 to 222)

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
05-233 Separation DC output adjustment (H), range at approx. 11 mm from the leading edge
of paper
05-234 Separation DC output adjustment (C), center of paper
05-235 Separation DC output adjustment (L), ranges at approx. 11 to 46 mm from the leading
edge of paper and at approx. 48 mm from the trailing edge of paper

Description
As the set value is increased, the DC voltage is increased and positive charges on the paper are
decreased; therefore, the separation is easier to be performed. On the other hand, as the set value is
decreased, the DC voltage is decreased and the ratio of the positive charges on the paper decreasing
is reduced; therefore, the separation is more difficult to be performed.
For further information, refer to 3.6 [Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer] in the Service Handbook.

* Default: 05-233: 55, 05-234: 55, 05-235: 36


* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Separation is more difficult, 255: separation is easier)

Adjustment Timing
When replacing the high-voltage transformer
If poor paper separation occurs
If poor transfer (avatar phenomenon) occurs

Caution
Perform this adjustment with the process unit (cleaner and developer) being removed.
The digital tester, high-voltage transformer adjustment jig, and cover open switch release jig for ser-
vice are required to adjust these codes.
Increase the separation DC output, if poor paper separation occurs regardless of the charger wire
being soiled or if thin paper is used frequently. Note that poor transfer (avatar phenomenon) occurs
when the separation DC output is increased too much.
If poor transfer (avatar phenomenon) occurs, decrease the separation DC output value. Note that
when the separation output value is decreased too much, paper separation ability decreases.
By using the following codes, the separation DC output values set by codes 05-233 to 235 are cor-
rected to choose the appropriate printing condition.
- Separation DC output correction (08-831/870/871)

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2-7
05-247/270

Temperature/Humidity Sensor Temperature/Humidity Display

Purpose
These codes are used to display the temperature and humidity of the environment where the equip-
ment is installed.
The temperature and humidity are detected through the temperature/humidity sensor installed on the
left of the equipment.
The displayed data is updated at the specific timing.
These codes are used only to display the temperature or humidity, and no values can be set.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
05-247 Temperature/humidity sensor humidity display
05-270 Temperature/humidity sensor temperature display

Description
When these codes are performed, the temperature and humidity detected through the temperature/
humidity sensor are displayed. When the print operation is completed, the temperature and humidity
data is retrieved and each display is updated.

* Default: 05-247: 50 (%), 05-270: 23 (C)


* Acceptable values: 0 to 100

Adjustment Timing
Use these codes to check the temperature and humidity detected through the temperature/humidity
sensor.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-8
05-248

Drum Thermistor Temperature Display

Purpose
This code is used to display the temperature of the drum surface.
The temperature of the drum is detected through the drum thermistor installed in the developer unit. 2
The displayed data is updated at the specific timing.
This code is used only to display the temperature, and no values can be set.

Description
When this code is performed, the temperature of the drum detected through the drum thermistor is dis-
played.
When the print operation is completed, the temperature data is retrieved and the drum temperature dis-
play is updated.

* Default: 23 (C)
* Acceptable values: 0 to 100

Adjustment Timing
Use this code to check the temperature of the drum.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2-9
05-280

Enforced Performing of Toner Recycle Idle

Purpose
This code is used to idle the recovery toner supply mechanism and forcibly remove toner from the
cleaner unit when replacing the developer material.

Description
When this code is performed, the recovery toner supply mechanism is idled and toner is forcibly
removed from the cleaner unit.

Adjustment Timing
Perform this adjustment, and then replace the developer material.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 10
05-286

Laser Power Adjustment

Purpose
Latent image is produced when the laser beam is irradiated onto the drum. This code is used to adjust
the printing density by adjusting the output of the laser beam. 2
Description
As the set value is increased, the laser output increases and the printing density becomes higher. On
the other hand, as it is decreased, the laser output decreases and the printing density becomes lower.

* Default: 60
* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum density, 255: Maximum density)

Adjustment Timing
Use this code to adjust the printing density by changing the laser power.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.
By using "Laser power correction (08-872/873/875 to 877/883), the laser output value set by code
05-286 is corrected by operation mode and original mode so that the optimal printing density can be
set.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 11
05-305

Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Secondary Scanning Direction

Purpose
This code is used to adjust the scan start position in the scanner secondary scanning direction, to fit in
the proper position of the scanning range in the scanner secondary scanning direction.

Description
As the set value is increased, the scanning range is shifted toward the end point of the scanner second-
ary scanning direction. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the scanning range is shifted toward the
start point of the scanner secondary scanning direction. On a printed sheet of paper, as the set value is
increased, the image moves to the trailing edge of paper. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the
image moves to the leading edge of paper.

* Default: 105
* Acceptable values: 51 to 206 (51: Maximum to the leading edge of paper, 206: Maximum to the trail-
ing edge of paper)
When the set value is decreased Appropriate scanning position When the set value is increased

Scanning range

Scanner secondary scanning direction

* The shaded area indicates the read area of the original.

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a copy image and if the "image dimen-
sional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment:
- CIS unit

Caution
This adjustment requires a scale.
Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this
adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.
05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444
> 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 >
05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434
* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455, 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 12
05-306

Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Primary Scanning Direction

Purpose
This code is used to adjust the scan start position in the scanner primary scanning direction, to fit in the
proper position of the scanning range in the scanner primary scanning direction. 2
Description
As the set value is increased, the scanning range is shifted toward the end point of the scanner primary
scanning direction. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the scanning range is shifted toward the start
point of the scanner primary scanning direction. On a printed sheet of paper, as the set value is
increased, the image moves to the front of paper. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image
moves to the rear of paper.

* Default: 127
* Acceptable values: 121 to 136 (121: Maximum to the rear of paper, 136: Maximum to the front of
paper)
When the set value is decreased Appropriate scanning position When the set value is increased
Scanner primary scanning direction

Scanning range

* The shaded area indicates the read area of the original.

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimen-
sional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment:
- CIS unit

Caution
This adjustment requires a scale.
Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this
adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.
05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444
> 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 >
05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434
* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455, 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 13
05-310

Forced Performing of Peak Detection

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
This code is used to absorb the variation in the amount of light emitted from the exposure light sources
for each LED (R-LED, B-LED and YG-LED) installed on the CIS (Contact Image Sensor) Unit, due to
individual differences and secular changes, to optimize the amount of light emitted through the life cycle
of the equipment, and to ensure the color sensitivity when scanning an original.

Description
When this code is performed, each LED individually lights up and the amount of light emitted is auto-
matically adjusted, and the adjusted current emission value is retained. Then, each LED lights up
according to the retained current value.

Notes:
Perform this code according to the following steps:
1. Close the original cover, ADF or RADF.
2. Enter this code in 05 ADJUSTMENT code. Then Press the [START] or [COPY] button.
3. Automatic adjustment is performed as described below:
- The CIS unit moves.
- After the equipment is suspended for a few seconds, the green light is emitted from the
light source for some ten seconds, and goes out for a moment.
- The red light is emitted from the light source for a few seconds and goes out for a moment.
- The blue light is emitted from the light source for a few seconds and goes out for a
moment.
- The yellow light is emitted from the light source for a few seconds and goes out for a
moment.
- The whitish green light is emitted from the light source for a few seconds, and then goes
out for a moment.
- The whitish green light is emitted from the light source for some ten seconds, and then
goes out.
4. Press the [CANCEL] button to finish the adjustment.
* An error (C26) may occasionally occur during the adjustment. If the error occurs, refer to Cau-
tion to handle the error.

Adjustment Timing
When replacing the CIS unit, MAIN board and SRAM board

Caution
If the error (C26) occurs when this code is performed, handle the error according to the following steps:
1) Set the default values for codes 05-311, 312 and 313.
2) Perform this code.
* In case the error occurs at this point, proceed with the next step.
3) Turn the main switch OFF and ON to normally start up the equipment.
* In case the error (C26) still occurs even after the above operations, replace the CIS unit and perform
this code again.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 14
05-311 to 313

R / B / YG-LED Current Actual Value Setting

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the current actual value for the exposure light source installed on the
CIS (Contact Image Sensor) Unit. 2
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
05-311 R-LED Current actual value adjustment (Light guide tube: main light source)
05-312 B-LED Current actual value adjustment (Light guide tube: main light source)
05-313 YG-LED Current actual value adjustment (LED alley: sub light source)

Description
When this code is performed, the current actual value (current set initial value + light amount correction
value) for each LED is changed.
The default value is set at the same as the current set initial value for each LED (without correction).

* Default: 05-311: 76, 05-312: 62, 05-313: 160


* Acceptable values: 0 to 255

Adjustment Timing
None.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 15
05-340

Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Scanner Secondary Scanning

Purpose
This code is used to adjust the scan speed in the scanner secondary scanning direction to scan an orig-
inal in the actual ratio.

Description
As the set value is increased, the reproduction ratio in the scanner secondary scanning direction
becomes increased. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the reproduction ratio becomes decreased.

* Default: 134
* Acceptable values: 76 to 181 (76: Minimum reproduction ratio, 181: Maximum reproduction ratio,
Adjustment amount: 0.0947%/step)

When the set value is decreased Appropriate reproduction ratio for scanning When the set value is increased

Scanning range

Scanner secondary scanning direction

* The shaded area indicates the read area of the original.

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimen-
sional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment:
- CIS unit

Caution
This adjustment requires a scale.
Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this
adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.
05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444
> 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 >
05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434
* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455, 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 16
05-350/351

Shading Position Adjustment

Purpose
When streaky images are output due to scratches or dirt on the shading correction plate, these codes
are used to adjust the shading correction position in order to enable shading correction while keeping 2
off the scratches or dirt.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
05-350 Shading position adjustment when using the original glass
05-351 Shading position adjustment when using the ADF/RADF

Description
As the set value is increased, the shading correction position moves to the left of the equipment. On the
other hand, as it is decreased, the shading correction position moves to the right of the equipment.

* Default: 128
* Acceptable values: 118 to 138 (Adjustment amount: 0.064 mm/step)

In the case of scratches or dirt on a part of the shading correction plate, use these codes to adjust the
shading correction position while keeping off the scratches or dirt, and prevent images from being
streaky.

Adjustment Timing
Perform this adjustment, if images with streaks in the secondary scanning direction are produced.

Caution
If streaky images persist after this adjustment is performed, clean the shading correction plate.
If streaky images still persist, replace the shading correction plate.
If streaky images still persist, check other areas, such as the drum, for flaws or dirt.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 17
05-354/355

ADF/RADF Paper Aligning Amount Adjustment

* Code 05-355 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
A skew of the original is eliminated by making its leading edge contact the aligning roller and slightly
slacking it, when the ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) or the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document
Feeder) is used to fed. These codes are used to adjust the paper aligning amount for the accurate
alignment of the leading edge of paper. Individual codes are available because different rollers are used
when scanning simplex and duplex originals.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
05-354 Simplex (face) scanning (ADF/RADF)
05-355 Duplex (reverse side) scanning (RADF)

Description
As the set value is increased, the paper aligning amount becomes increased. On the other hand, as it is
decreased, the paper aligning amount becomes decreased.

* Default: 10
* Acceptable values: 0 to 20 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 20: Maximum aligning amount)

Adjustment Timing
When feeding a simplex (face) original:
If an original cannot be fed successfully due to the worn-out ADF/RADF feed roller and if this causes a
defective or skewed image, perform this adjustment and increase the paper aligning amount. This is
useful as a life-prolong action, until the feed roller is replaced, preventing the image failure.

When feeding a duplex (reverse side) original:


If an original cannot be fed successfully due to the worn-out ADF/RADF reverse roller and if this causes
a defective or skewed image, perform this adjustment and increase the paper aligning amount. This is
useful as a life-prolong action, until the reverse roller is replaced, preventing the image failure.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 18
05-357

Fine Adjustment of ADF/RADF Transport Speed

Purpose
This code is used to adjust the reproduction ratio in the secondary scanning direction. This can be done
by changing the ADF/RADF read motor rotating speed because it can change the speed of the original 2
passing the ADF original glass.

Description
As the set value is increased, the reproduction ratio in the scanner secondary scanning direction
becomes increased. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the reproduction ratio becomes decreased.

* Default: 50
* Acceptable values: 0 to 100 (0: Minimum reproduction ratio, 100: Maximum reproduction ratio)

When the set value is decreased Appropriate reproduction ratio for scanning When the set value is increased

Scanning range

Scanner secondary scanning direction

* To understand corresponding scanning ranges done by the ADF/RADF on the original glass, they
are shown in shaded areas.

Adjustment Timing
After the following part are replaced, if there is a problem with a copied image done by ADF/RADF and
if the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning is required, perform this adjustment.
- Read motor (parts for the ADF/RADF)

Caution
This adjustment requires comparison of a copy image with an original.
The scanning position of the equipment (or the image dimensional adjustment) must be correctly
adjusted prior to this adjustment.
If deviated from its correct position, the scanning position when using the ADF/RADF cannot be cor-
rectly adjusted.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 19
05-358

ADF/RADF Side Deviation Adjustment

Purpose
This code is used to adjust the scanning position in the scanner primary scanning direction when the
ADF/RADF is used, to fit in the proper position of the scanning range in the scanner primary scanning
direction.

Description
As the set value is increased, the scanning range is shifted toward the end point of the scanner primary
scanning direction. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the scanning range is shifted toward the start
point of the scanner primary scanning direction. On a printed sheet of paper, as the set value is
increased, the image moves to the rear of paper. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image
moves to the front of paper.

* Default: 128
* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Maximum to the front of paper, 255: Maximum to the rear of paper)

When the set value is decreased Appropriate scanning position When the set value is increased
Scanner primary scanning direction

Scanning range

* To understand corresponding scanning ranges done by the ADF/RADF on the original glass, they
are shown in shaded areas.

Adjustment Timing
If there is a problem in the printing image of the ADF/RADF and range adjustment of scanner primary
scanning direction is required, perform this adjustment.

Caution
This adjustment requires comparison of a copy image with an original.
The scanning position of the equipment (or the image dimensional adjustment) must be correctly
adjusted prior to this adjustment. If the scanning position of the equipment is deviated from the cor-
rect position, the scanning position when the ADF/RADF is used cannot be correctly adjusted.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 20
05-359

CIS Unit Position Adjustment during Scanning from ADF/RADF

Purpose
When the ADF/RADF is used to scan an original, the amount of light reflected from the exposure light
source becomes to the maximum and the CIS unit position is determined where the best image can be 2
obtained.

Description
As the set value is increased, the CIS unit moves to the left of the equipment. On the other hand, as it is
decreased, the CIS unit moves to the right of the equipment.

* Default: 128
* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Maximum to the right of the equipment, 255: Maximum to the left of
the equipment)

Adjustment Timing
Perform this adjustment, if a scan image when the ADF/RADF is used results in poor quality, compared
to a scan image using the original glass.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 21
05-365/366

Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Primary Scanning Direction


(When the ADF/RADF is Used)

Purpose
When the ADF/RADF is used to scan an original, it is transported to the scanning position on the origi-
nal glass and then stopped. These codes are used to adjust the original stop position on the original
glass, to fit in the proper position of the scanning range in the scanner secondary scanning direction.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
05-365 Simplex (face) scanning (ADF/RADF)
05-366 Duplex (reverse side) scanning (RADF)

Description
As the set value is increased, the original is transported to the position closer to the original scale. As a
result, the scanning range is shifted toward the end point of the scanner secondary scanning direction.
On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the original is transported to the position far away
from the original scale. As a result, the scanning range is shifted toward the start point of the scanner
secondary scanning direction.
On a printed sheet of paper, as the set value is increased, the image moves to the trailing edge of
paper. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the image moves to the leading edge of paper.

* Default: 50
* Acceptable values: 0 to 100 (0: Maximum to the leading edge of paper, 100: Maximum to the trailing
edge of paper)

When the set value is decreased Appropriate scanning position When the set value is increased

Scanning range

Scanner secondary scanning direction (when the RADF is used)

* To understand corresponding scanning ranges done by the ADF/RADF on the original glass, they
are shown in shaded areas.

Adjustment Timing
For instance, after the ADF/RADF is installed and the test copy is made, if the scan start position is
deviated from the appropriate position, perform this adjustment.

Caution
The scanning position of the equipment (or the image dimensional adjustment) must be correctly
adjusted prior to this adjustment. If the scanning position of the equipment is deviated from the correct
position, scanning position when the ADF/RADF is used cannot be correctly adjusted.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 22
05-401/405/1300

Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Primary Scanning Direction


(Fine Adjustment of Polygonal Motor Rotation Speed)

* Code 05-1300 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* Code 05-1300 is valid only when the FAX Kit is installed. 2

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the rotation speed of the polygonal mirror. This changes in pitch of the
laser with which the drum is irradiated in the drum primary scanning direction and finally adjusts the
reproduction ratio in the primary scanning direction.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Sub code Applied to
05-401 - Primary scanning direction reproduction ratio in the printer operation
05-405 - Primary scanning direction reproduction ratio in the copy operation
05-1300 0 Primary scanning direction reproduction ratio in the fax print operation (printing
without rotating an image)
1 Primary scanning direction reproduction ratio in the fax print operation (printing
with rotating an image)

Description
As the set value is increased, the reproduction ratio in the primary scanning direction is increased. On
the other hand, as it is decreased, the reproduction ratio is decreased.

* Default: 05-401: 134, 05-405: 131, 05-1300-0/1: 128


* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum reproduction ratio, 255: Maximum reproduction ratio)

[05-401]
Key in 1, press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in 1 and press the [START] button to print a
grid pattern with 10 mm square from the A3 or LD drawer. Next, measure the distance between the 1st
line and the 21st line from the left edge of the printed grid pattern, and check if the distance is within the
specified range, 200 mm 0.5 mm.
Refer to 3.2.3 [Printer related adjustment (A)] in the Service Handbook.

When the set value is decreased Appropriate printing position When the set value is increased
Paper movement direction
Primary scanning direction

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 23
[05-405]

Paper movement direction

Primary scanning direction

* Shaded areas indicate the image on the paper.

[05-1300]
Code 05-401 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the primary scanning direction reproduction
ratio. However, if a fax image does not match with the expected primary scanning ratio, code 05-1300
can be used to finely correct the primary scanning ratio. (The adjustment steps are the same as for
code 05-401.)

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimen-
sional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment:
- Laser optical unit - SRAM board

Caution
The adjustment for code 05-405 requires a scale.
Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this
adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.
05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444
> 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 >
05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434
* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/
205.
Code 05-401 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the primary scanning direction reproduction
ratio, therefore, the adjustment using code 05-1300 is unnecessary, unless otherwise required. If the
adjustment using code 05-1300 is still necessary, perform the image dimensional adjustment prior to
this adjustment.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 24
05-410/411/498

Adjustment of Primary Scanning Laser Writing Start Position

* Code 05-498 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose 2
These codes are used to adjust the start position of the irradiation with the laser in the primary scanning
direction, to fit in the printing range of the image in the printer primary scanning direction.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Sub code Applied to
05-410 - Printing position of primary scanning direction in the copy operation
05-411 - Printing position of primary scanning direction in the printer operation
05-498 0 Printing position of primary scanning direction of duplex (reverse side) printing,
Long size paper
1 Printing position of primary scanning direction of duplex (reverse side) printing,
Short size paper (A4/LT or smaller)

Description
As the set value is increased, the printing position of the image is shifted toward the end point (in a
direction where the left margin broadens out) of the primary scanning direction. On the other hand, as it
is decreased, the printing position is shifted toward the start point (in a direction where the left margin
narrows) of the primary scanning direction.

* Default: 05-410/411: 88, 05-498-0/1: 128


* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum left margin, 255: Maximum left margin)

[05-410]
The adjustment for code 05-410 is unnecessary because code 05-410 is automatically adjusted when
code 05-411 is adjusted.

[05-411]
Key in 1, press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in 1 and press the [START] button to print a
grid pattern with 10 mm square from the A3 or LD drawer. Next, measure the distance from the left
edge of paper to the 6th line of the printed grid pattern, and check if the distance is within the specified
range, 52 mm 0.5 mm.
Refer to 3.2.3 [Printer related adjustment (B)] in the Service Handbook.

When the set value is decreased Appropriate printing position When the set value is increased
Paper movement direction
Primary scanning direction

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 25
[05-498]
Key in 3, press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in 1 and press the [START] button to duplex
print a grid pattern with 10 mm square from the A3 or LD drawer. Next, measure the distance from the
left edge of paper to the 6th line of the printed grid pattern, and check if the distance is within the speci-
fied range, 52 mm 0.5 mm.

When the set value is decreased Appropriate printing position When the set value is increased
Paper movement direction

Primary scanning direction

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimen-
sional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment:
- Laser optical unit - SRAM board

Caution
Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this
adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.
05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444
> 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 >
05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434
* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/
205.
The adjustment for code 05-410 is unnecessary because code 05-410 is automatically adjusted
when code 05-411 is adjusted.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 26
05-421/422

Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Secondary Scanning Direction


(Fine Adjustment of Main Motor Rotation Speed)

* Code 05-422 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* Code 05-422 is valid only when the FAX Kit is installed. 2

Purpose
Changing the rotation speed of the drum changes the pitch of the laser with which the drum is irradiated
in the drum secondary scanning direction and adjusts the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning
direction.
* By fine adjusting the main motor speed with these codes, rotation speed of transport rollers changes
at the same time and appropriate "secondary scanning reproduction ratio" adjustment is performed.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
05-421 Printing reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction in the copy and
printer operations
05-422 Image reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction in the fax opera-
tion

Description
As the set value is increased, the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning direction is increased.
On the other hand, as it is decreased, the reproduction ratio is decreased.

* Default: 05-421/422: 128


* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum reproduction ratio, 255: Maximum reproduction ratio)

[05-421]
Key in 1, press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in 1 and press the [START] button to print a
grid pattern with 10 mm square from the A3 or LD drawer. Next, measure the distance between the 1st
line and the 21st line from the leading edge of the printed grid pattern, and check if the distance is
within the specified range, 200 mm 0.5 mm.
Refer to 3.2.3 [Printer related adjustment (C)] in the Service Handbook.

When the set value is decreased Appropriate printing position When the set value is increased
Paper movement direction

Secondary scanning direction

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 27
[05-422]
Code 05-421 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the secondary scanning direction reproduction
ratio. However, if a fax image does not match with the expected secondary scanning ratio, code 05-422
can be used to finely correct the secondary scanning ratio. (The adjustment steps are the same as for
code 05-421.)

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimen-
sional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment:
- Main motor - Drum

Caution
Code 05-421 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the secondary scanning direction reproduction
ratio, therefore, the adjustment using code 05-422 is unnecessary, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 28
05-424/425

Fine Adjustment of Exit Motor Rotation Speed

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* The exit motor is installed only when the ADU (Automatic Duplexing Unit) is installed.
* Code 05-425 is valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.
2
Purpose
When the exit motor rotation speed is too fast, paper sent from the fuser unit is tight. By adjusting the
rotation speed of the exit motor, the paper becoming tight can be prevented.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
05-424 Exit motor speed in the copy and printer operations
05-425 Exit motor speed in the fax operation

Description
As the set value is increased, the rotation speed becomes faster. On the other hand, as it is decreased,
the rotation speed becomes slower.

* Default: 05-424: 128, 05-425: 128


* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum rotation speed, 255: Maximum rotation speed)

* Code 05-424 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the fine adjustment of the exit motor rotation
speed. When code 05-425 is used, the basic adjusted value can be finely adjusted even more. How-
ever, basically, the adjustment using code 05-425 is unnecessary.

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced, if paper sent from the fuser unit is tight, perform this adjustment:
- Exit roller

Caution
Code 05-424 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the fine adjustment of the exit motor rotation
speed, therefore, the adjustment using code 05-425 is unnecessary, unless otherwise required.
Basically, adjustment is unnecessary because an ideal value is specified for the difference in speed
between the main motor as the driving source of the fuser roller, and the exit motor as the driving
source of the exit roller. Use these codes in a particular case, for example, paper transported
between the fuser roller and exit roller is tight due to its characteristics.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 29
05-430 to 438

Margin Adjustment

* Code 05-434 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
Perform top/left/right/bottom margin in copy and printer modes. Perform bottom margin adjustment at
duplex printing.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Sub code Applied to Function mode
05-430 - Top margin (blank area at the leading edge of the paper Copy
along the paper feeding direction)
05-431 - Left margin (blank area at the left of the paper along the
paper feeding direction)
05-432 - Right margin (blank area at the right of the paper along
the paper feeding direction)
05-433 - Bottom margin (blank area at the trailing edge of the
paper along the paper feeding direction)
05-434 0 Bottom margin, Duplex (reverse side) printing (blank
area at the trailing edge of the paper along the paper
feeding direction)
1 Bottom margin, Duplex (reverse side) printing (blank Printer
area at the trailing of the paper along the paper feeding
direction)
05-435 - Top margin (blank area at the leading edge of the paper
along the paper feeding direction)
05-436 - Left margin (blank area at the left of the paper along the
paper feeding direction)
05-437 - Right margin (blank area at the right of the paper along
the paper feeding direction)
05-438 - Bottom margin (blank area at the trailing edge of the
paper along the paper feeding direction)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 30
Description
By adjusting the image cutting range, adjustment of an apparent blank area is performed. As the set
value is increased, the margin (the area of the image being cut) increases. On the other hand, as it is
decreased, the margin becomes decreased.

* Default: 05-430: 9, 05-431: 0, 05-432: 110, 05-433: 153, 05-434: 29, 05-435: 24, 05-436 to 438: 0
* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum margin, 255: Maximum margin)
2
Paper movement direction

Top margin Bottom margin


Right

Right margin
Primary scanning direction

Bottom
Top

Left margin

Left

Adjustment Timing
When the margin is not in a specified value.

Caution
Open the original cover, ADF or RADF to perform this adjustment.
The left margin adjustment using codes 05-431/436 is unnecessary because the left margin is fixed
when "Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position (05-411)" is performed.
Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this
adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.
05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444
> 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 >
05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434
* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/
205.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 31
05-440 to 445

Adjustment of Secondary Scanning Laser Writing Start Position

* Codes 05-443 to 445 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the paper transport start timing of the laser writing, to fit in the printing
range of the image in the printer secondary scanning direction.
The benchmark for this adjustment is the secondary scanning printing position when the drawer is used
to feed (05-440). When code 05-440 is performed, the adjusted content is applied to the secondary
scanning printing position when other units are used to feed. Codes other than code 05-440 are pro-
vided in order to finely adjust the secondary scanning printing position when each unit is used to feed.
These codes must be performed after the secondary scanning printing position is adjusted when the
drawer is used to feed.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
05-440 Secondary scanning printing position when the drawer is used to feed
05-441 Secondary scanning printing position when the PFU (Paper Feed Unit) is
used to feed
05-442 Secondary scanning printing position when the bypass tray is used to feed
05-443 Reserved
05-444 Secondary scanning printing position when the PFP (Paper Feed Pedestal)
is used to feed
05-445 Secondary scanning printing position when the ADU (Automatic Duplexing
Unit) is used to feed

Description
As the set value is increased, the image printing position is shifted toward the end point (trailing edge of
paper) of the secondary scanning direction. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image printing
position is shifted toward the start point (leading edge of paper) of the secondary scanning direction.

* Default: 05-440: 14, 05-441: 21


* Acceptable values: 0 to 40 (0: Maximum to the leading edge of paper, 40: Maximum to the trailing
edge of paper)

* Default: 05-442 to 445: 8


* Acceptable values: 0 to 15 (0: Maximum to the leading edge of paper, 15: Maximum to the trailing
edge of paper)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 32
Key in 1 ([05-445] key in 3), press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in 1 and press the
[START] button to print a grid pattern with 10 mm square from each paper source. (A3/LD-sized paper
is only for the drawer and ADU. A4/LT-sized paper is for other units.)
Next, measure the distance from the leading edge of paper to the 6th line of the printed grid pattern,
and check if the distance is within the specified range, 52 mm 0.5 mm.
Refer to 3.2.3 [Printer related adjustment (D)] in the Service Handbook.

When the set value is decreased Appropriate printing position When the set value is increased 2
Paper movement direction

Secondary scanning direction

Adjustment Timing
After the following part is replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimen-
sional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment.
- Laser optical unit

Caution
First, adjust the secondary scanning printing position when the drawer is used to feed (05-440).
When code 05-440 is performed, this adjusted content is applied to the secondary scanning printing
position when other units are used to feed. Then finely adjust the secondary scanning printing posi-
tion when other than the drawer is used to feed.
Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this
adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.
05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444
> 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 >
05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434
* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/
205.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 33
05-448 to 451/455/458/460 to 463/474

Aligning Amount Adjustment

* Codes 05-448, 449, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
"Aligning" refers to a correction of a paper skew by making the paper contact the registration (aligning)
roller and slightly slacking the paper. This code is used to change the paper aligning amount.
The aligning amount is adjusted on an envelope according to "Aligning amount adjustment (envelope)
(05-464)."

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

[Aligning Amount Adjustment of PFP (Paper Feed Pedestal) Upper/Lower Drawer]


Code Sub code Applied to
05-448 0 PFP upper drawer, when plain paper is fed, long size
1 PFP upper drawer, when plain paper is fed, middle size
2 PFP upper drawer, when plain paper is fed, short size
05-449 0 PFP lower drawer, when plain paper is fed, long size
1 PFP lower drawer, when plain paper is fed, middle size
2 PFP lower drawer, when plain paper is fed, short size

Note:
Only two types of codes are described here. For other codes and default, refer to the next pages.
The upcoming explanations for the following parts regarding "Adjustment timing", "Caution" are
common; therefore, they are abbreviated.

The paper sizes described here are as follows:


Paper size Size
Long size 330 mm or longer
Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm
Short size 219 mm or shorter

Description
As the set value is increased, the paper aligning amount becomes increased. On the other hand, as it is
decreased, the paper aligning amount becomes decreased.

* Default: 14
* Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

Adjustment Timing
If paper cannot be fed successfully due to the worn-out feed roller and if this causes a defective
image, such as a skew, perform this adjustment and increase the paper aligning amount. This is
useful as a life-prolong action, until the feed roller is replaced, preventing the defective print image.
If there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimensional adjustment" is required, per-
form this adjustment to adjust the aligning amount prior to individual adjustment.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 34
Caution
Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this
adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.
05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444 >
05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 > 05-437
> 05-438 > 05-434
* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.
2
[Aligning Amount Adjustment of Drawer]
Code Sub code Applied to
05-450 0 Drawer, when plain paper is fed, long size
1 Drawer, when plain paper is fed, middle size
2 Drawer, when plain paper is fed, short size

* Default: 22
* Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

[Aligning Amount Adjustment of PFU (Paper Feed Unit)]


Code Sub code Applied to
05-451 0 PFU, when plain paper is fed, long size
1 PFU, when plain paper is fed, middle size
2 PFU, when plain paper is fed, short size

* Default: 14
* Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

[Aligning Amount Adjustment of ADU (Automatic Duplexing Unit)]


Code Sub code Applied to
05-455 0 ADU, when plain paper is fed, long size
1 ADU, when plain paper is fed, middle size
2 ADU, when plain paper is fed, short size
05-474 0 ADU, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, long size
1 ADU, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, middle size
2 ADU, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, short size

* Default: 05-455-0 to 2: 38, 05-474-0/1: 24, 05-474-2: 33


* Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 35
[Aligning Amount Adjustment of Bypass Tray]
Code Sub code Applied to
05-458 0 Bypass tray, when plain paper is fed, long size
1 Bypass tray, when plain paper is fed, middle size
2 Bypass tray, when plain paper is fed, short size
05-460 0 Bypass tray, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, long size
1 Bypass tray, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, middle size
2 Bypass tray, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, short size
05-461 0 Bypass tray, when thick paper 2 mode is used to feed, long size
1 Bypass tray, when thick paper 2 mode is used to feed, middle size
2 Bypass tray, when thick paper 2 mode is used to feed, short size
05-462 0 Bypass tray, when thick paper 3 mode is used to feed, long size
1 Bypass tray, when thick paper 3 mode is used to feed, middle size
2 Bypass tray, when thick paper 3 mode is used to feed, short size
3 Bypass tray, when thick paper 3 mode is used to feed, post card
05-463 0 Bypass tray, when transparency film mode is used to feed, long size
1 Bypass tray, when transparency film mode is used to feed, middle size
2 Bypass tray, when transparency film mode is used to feed, short size

* Default: 10
* Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 36
05-464

Aligning Amount Adjustment (Envelope)

Purpose
"Aligning" refers to a correction of skew of an envelope when the envelope is fed from the bypass tray.
The envelope is aligned by making its leading edge contact the registration (aligning) roller and slightly 2
slacking it. This code is used to adjust the envelope aligning amount for the accurate alignment.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Sub code Applied to
05-464 0 Bypass tray, Envelope, Length: 330 mm or longer
1 Bypass tray, Envelope, Length: 220 mm to 329 mm
2 Bypass tray, Envelope, Length: 219 mm or shorter
* An envelope should be placed lengthwise (R direction).

Description
As the set value is increased, the envelope aligning amount becomes increased. On the other hand, as
it is decreased, the envelope aligning amount becomes decreased.

* Default: 10
* Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

Adjustment Timing
If an envelope cannot be fed successfully due to the worn-out feed roller of the bypass tray and if
this causes a defective or skewed image, perform this adjustment and increase the envelope align-
ing amount. This is useful as a life-prolong action, until the feed roller is replaced, preventing the
defective print image.
If there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimensional adjustment" is required, per-
form this adjustment to adjust the aligning amount prior to individual adjustment.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 37
05-466

Adjustment of Pushing Amount from Behind

Purpose
When paper is fed from the bypass tray, it is transported with the registration (aligning) roller. At the
same time, the feed roller is also driven to support the paper transport to the registration (aligning) roller
(by pushing the paper from behind). This code is used to adjust the time of pushing the paper from
behind, to ensure that paper is securely fed.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Sub code Applied to
05-466 0 Bypass tray, when plain paper mode is used to feed
1 Bypass tray, when post card mode is used to feed
2 Reserved
3 Bypass tray, when envelope mode is used to feed
4 Bypass tray, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed
5 Bypass tray, when thick paper 2 mode is used to feed
6 Bypass tray, when thick paper 3 mode is used to feed
7 Bypass tray, when transparency film mode is used to feed

Description
As the set value is increased, the driving time of the feed roller becomes longer and the amount of
pushing the paper from behind becomes increased. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the driving
time of the feed roller becomes shorter and the amount of pushing the paper from behind becomes
decreased.

* Default: 0
* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0 to 128: No pushing, 255: Maximum amount of pushing)

Adjustment Timing
Particularly when thick paper is fed from the bypass tray, if it is not fully pulled to the registration roller
and the following error occurs, perform this adjustment to further push the paper from behind.
Error code: E010 (Leading edge of paper stops at the registration roller)

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 38
05-497

Adjustment of Drawer Sideways Deviation

Purpose
This code is used to adjust the start position of the irradiation with the laser in the primary scanning
direction, to fit the side deviation in the printing range of the image in the printer primary scanning direc- 2
tion.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Sub code Applied to
05-497 0 Drawer side deviation
1 PFU drawer side deviation
2 PFP upper drawer side deviation
3 PFP lower drawer side deviation
5 Bypass tray side deviation
* Sub codes 2 and 3 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Description
As the set value is increased, the printing position is shifted toward the end point (the left margin broad-
ens out) of the primary scanning direction. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the scanning range is
shifted toward the start point (the left margin narrows) of the primary scanning direction.

* Default: 128
* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum left margin, 255: Maximum left margin)

Key in 1, press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in 1 and press the [START] button to print a
grid pattern with 10 mm square from the A3 or LD drawer. Next, measure the distance from the left
edge of paper to the 6th line of the printed grid pattern, and check if the distance is within the specified
range, 52 mm 0.5 mm.
Refer to 3.2.3 [Printer related adjustment (B)] in the Service Handbook.

When the set value is decreased Appropriate printing position When the set value is increased
Paper movement direction
Primary scanning direction

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced and when an adjustment is necessary because there is a side
deviation.
- Drawer - PFU drawer - PFP upper drawer - PFP lower drawer - Bypass tray

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 39
Caution
Basically, do not perform deviation adjustments for the drawer (05-497-0) and PFU drawer (05-497-
1). When adjustments of the drawer and PFU drawer are necessary, perform the adjustments using
"Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position (05-411)."
Perform the "Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position (05-411)" prior to this adjust-
ment.
The primary scanning laser writing start position adjusted in "Adjustment of primary scanning laser
writing start position (05-411)" is the benchmark and the drawer side deviation (05-497) is the
adjustment used to correct this benchmark.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 40
05-501/503/504/700/710/714/845 to 847

Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjustment (Center Setting)


(Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)

* Codes 05-700, 710 and 714 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.
* Codes 05-700, 710 and 714 are valid only when the FAX Kit is installed. 2

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the image density to the desired level when the manual density mode is
used.
Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Applied to Function mode
05-501 Photo mode Copy
05-503 Text/photo mode
05-504 Text mode
05-700 Text mode Fax
(As the grayscale is binary (black/white), this will be simple
binary threshold adjustment.)
05-710 Text/photo mode
05-714 Photo mode
05-845 Text/photo mode Scanner
05-846 Text mode
05-847 Photo mode

Description
As the set value is increased, the image density becomes higher, with the density level set to the center
in manual density mode. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image density becomes lower.
However, in Text mode with Fax Function (05-700), as the set value is increased, the image density
becomes lower, with the density level set to the center in manual density mode. On the other hand, as it
is decreased, the image density becomes higher.

* Default: 05-501/503/504: 128, 05-700: 120, 05-710/714/845 to 847: 128


* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Lightest, 255: Darkest)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to reset the center density set value in manual density mode
during the copy/fax transmission/scan operation when necessary.

Caution
If the set value is larger, the life of supplies may become shorter.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 41
05-505 to 507/701/715/719/850 to 852

Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjustment (Lighter Setting)


(Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)

* Codes 05-701, 715 and 719 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.
* Codes 05-701, 715 and 719 are valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the amount of change in the output image density per step, if the den-
sity slider is set to the "lighter" side, when the manual density mode is used. This adjustment is
intended to obtain a desired image density for the density setting.
Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Applied to Function mode
05-505 Text/Photo mode Copy
05-506 Photo mode
05-507 Text mode
05-701 Text mode Fax
(As the grayscale is binary (black/white), this will be simple
binary threshold adjustment.)
05-715 Photo mode
05-719 Text/photo mode
05-850 Text/photo mode Scanner
05-851 Text mode
05-852 Photo mode

Description
As the set value is increased, the decreasing tendency of the density becomes stronger (much lighter)
when the density level is set to "lighter" side. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the decreasing ten-
dency of the density becomes weaker (less lighter) when the density level is set to "lighter" side.

* Default: 33
* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Darkest, 255: Lightest)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to reset the density per step when the density level is set to
"lighter" side, during the copy/ fax transmission/scan operation when necessary.

Caution
If the set value is too large, the adjustment for -1 or more may not be performed when the manual
density level is set to "lighter" side.
If "0" is set, the density may not change when the density level is set on the control panel.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 42
05-508 to 510/702/720/724/855 to 857

Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjustment (Darker Setting)


(Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)

* Codes 05-702, 720 and 724 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.
* Codes 05-702, 720 and 724 are valid only when the FAX Kit is installed. 2

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the amount of change in the output image density per step, if the den-
sity slider is set to the "darker" side, when the manual density mode is used. This adjustment is
intended to obtain a desired image density for the density setting.
Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Applied to Function mode
05-508 Text/Photo mode Copy
05-509 Photo mode
05-510 Text mode
05-702 Text mode Fax
(As the grayscale is binary (black/white), this will be sim-
ple binary threshold adjustment.)
05-720 Photo mode
05-724 Text/photo mode
05-855 Text/photo mode Scanner
05-856 Text mode
05-857 Photo mode

Description
As the set value is increased, the image density becomes higher, with the density level set to "darker"
side in manual density mode. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image density becomes lower.

* Default: 33
* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Lightest, 255: Darkest)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to reset the density per step when the density level is set to
"darker" side, during the copy/fax transmission/scan operation when necessary.

Caution
If the set value is too large, the adjustment for +1 or more may not be performed when the manual
density level is set to "darker" side.
If "0" is set, the density may not change when the density level is set on the control panel.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 43
05-512/514/515/725/729/860 to 862

Density Adjustment "Automatic Density" Fine Adjustment (Copy/FAX/


Scanner Function)

* Codes 05-725 and 729 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the image density to the desired level when the automatic density
mode is used.
Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Applied to Function mode
05-512 Photo mode Copy
05-514 Text/Photo mode
05-515 Text mode
05-725 Photo mode Fax
05-729 Text/photo mode
05-860 Text/photo mode Scanner
05-861 Text mode
05-862 Photo mode

Description
As the set value is increased, the image density becomes higher in automatic density mode. On the
other hand, as it is decreased, the image density becomes lower.

* Default: 128
* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Lightest, 255: Darkest)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to reset the image density in automatic density mode during
the copy/fax transmission/scan operation when necessary.

Caution
If the set value is larger, the life of supplies may become shorter.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 44
05-532 to 534/835 to 837

Range Correction Background Peak Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function)

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the background peak of the range correction during the copy/scan
operation. By adjusting the background peak, an image becomes much whiter because pixels judged 2
as "white" are increased.
Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Applied to Function mode
05-532 Text/Photo mode Copy[
05-533 Photo mode
05-534 Text mode
05-835 Text/photo mode Scanner
05-836 Text mode
05-837 Photo mode

Description
As the set value is increased, the image background is not printed out. On the other hand, as it is
decreased, the image background is not deleted but remains.

* Default: 05-532: 32, 05-533: 22, 05-534: 46, 05-835: 32, 05-836: 46, 05-837: 16
* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Blacker than the image, 255: Whiter than the image)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to make the image white during the copy/scan operation
when necessary.

Caution
Text handwritten with a pencil, light text, or thin lines may not be printed clearly, depending on the
adjustment. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy/scanned-in image.
The adjustment value for copying becomes valid when "fixed background peak" is selected in
"Range correction (05-570 to 572/693 to 695)."
The adjustment value for scanning becomes valid when "fixed background peak" is selected in
"Range correction (05-825 to 827/830 to 832)."

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 45
05-535 to 537/820 to 822

Range Correction Text Peak Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function)

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the text peak of the range correction during the copy/scan operation.
By adjusting the text peak, an image becomes much blacker because pixels judged as "black" are
increased.
Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Applied to Function mode
05-535 Text/Photo mode Copy
05-536 Photo mode
05-537 Text mode
05-820 Text/photo mode Scanner
05-821 Text mode
05-822 Photo mode

Description
As the set value is increased, the entire image becomes white. On the other hand, as it is decreased,
the entire image becomes black.

* Default: 05-535: 246, 05-536: 254, 05-537: 236, 05-820: 246, 05-821: 236, 05-822: 254
* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Blacker than the image, 255: Whiter than the image)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to make the image black during the copy/scan operation
when necessary.

Caution
Text handwritten with a pencil, light text, or thin lines may not be printed clearly, and a dark area may
be blurred, depending on the adjustment. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while check-
ing the copy/scanned-in image.
The adjustment value for copying becomes valid when "fixed text peak" is selected in "Range cor-
rection (05-570 to 572/693 to 695)."
The adjustment value for scanning becomes valid when "fixed text peak" is selected in "Range cor-
rection (05-825 to 827/830 to 832)."

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 46
05-570 to 572/693 to 695/825 to 827/830 to 832

Range Correction (Copy/Scan Function)

Purpose
These codes are used to switch the background peak and text peak to fixed/varied, by specifying the
range correction method during the copy/scan operation. Once fixed peak is selected, the range cor- 2
rection is performed with the fixed values. The value of the background peak affects the reproducibility
of the image background density. On the other hand, the value of the text peak affects the reproducibil-
ity of the text density.
Perform this adjustment under the use conditions of the original glass, ADF and RADF in each func-
tion mode with each original mode selected.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Applied to Function mode
05-570 The original glass is used, text/photo mode Copy[
05-571 The original glass is used, photo mode
05-572 The original glass is used, text mode
05-693 The ADF/RADF is used, text/photo mode
05-694 The ADF/RADF is used, photo mode
05-695 The ADF/RADF is used, text mode
05-825 The original glass is used, text/photo mode Scanner
05-826 The original glass is used, text mode
05-827 The original glass is used, photo mode
05-830 The ADF/RADF is used, text/photo mode
05-831 The ADF/RADF is used, text mode
05-832 The ADF/RADF is used, photo mode

Description
When these codes are used, the range correction method is specified by the one's and ten's place.
Allocated in the one's place is for the automatic density mode, and the ten's place for manual density
mode.
Setting range for each digit is as shown below:
Background peak Text peak
1: fixed fixed
2: varied fixed
3: fixed varied
4: varied varied
e.g. When the set value is "22," "the background peak is varied and the text peak is fixed" in both
automatic density mode and manual density mode.

* Default: 05-570: EUR/UC: 12, JPN: 22, 05-571: 12, 05-572: 22, 05-693: EUR/UC: 12, JPN: 22, 05-
694: 12, 05-695: 22, 05-825 to 827, 830 to 832: 12
* Acceptable values: 11 to 14, 21 to 24, 31 to 34, 41 to 44

Adjustment Timing
Perform this adjustment to adjust the reproducibility of the image background density and the text den-
sity.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 47
05-593 to 595

Gamma Data Slope Correction (Copy Function)

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust image contrast by correcting the gamma data slope during the copy
operation.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
05-593 Copy function, text/photo mode
05-594 Copy function, photo mode
05-595 Copy function, text mode

Description
As the set value is increased, the image contrast becomes higher. On the other hand, as it is
decreased, the image contrast becomes lower.

* Default: 5
* Acceptable values: 1 to 9 (0: Lowest contrast, 9: Highest contrast)

Adjustment Timing
Use these codes to adjust the image contrast during the copy operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 48
05-596 to 599

Gamma Balance Adjustment (Printer Function)

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.
2
Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the gamma balance of the image density in three areas, low, medium,
and high density areas, when the network printer function is used.
Perform this adjustment in each halftone mode for each emulation by density area.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Sub code Applied to Emulation
05-596 0 Smooth mode, low density area PS
1 Smooth mode, medium density area
2 Smooth mode, high density area
05-597 0 Detail mode, low density area
1 Detail mode, medium density area
2 Detail mode, high density area
05-598 0 Smooth mode, low density area PCL
1 Smooth mode, medium density area
2 Smooth mode, high density area
05-599 0 Detail mode, low density area
1 Detail mode, medium density area
2 Detail mode, high density area

Description
As the set value is increased, the image density in the intended adjustment density area becomes
higher. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image density becomes lower.
Turn the main switch OFF and ON. Then perform the printer operation to check the image quality.

* Default: 128
* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Lightest, 255: Darkest)

Adjustment Timing
Use these codes to check the image when the network printer function is used, and perform this adjust-
ment.

Caution
The density of light text or a graphic image varies, if the medium or high density area is mainly
adjusted. It is not affected, if the low density area is adjusted.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 49
05-600 to 602/869 to 871

Background Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function)

Purpose
These codes are used to switch the background adjustment data and adjust the background density
during the copy/scan operation.
Perform this adjustment in each original mode.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Applied to Function mode
05-600 Text/photo mode Copy
05-601 Text mode
05-602 Photo mode
05-869 Text/photo mode Scanner
05-870 Text mode
05-871 Photo mode

Description
As the set value is increased, the background becomes lighter. On the other hand, as it is decreased,
the background becomes darker.

* Default: 05-600 to 602: 3, 05-869: 4, 05-870: 6, 05-871: 4


* Acceptable values: 1 to 9 (1: Darker background (reproduced), 9: Lighter background (eliminated))

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to adjust the reproducibility of the image background density.

Caution
If the adjustment is performed to make the background lighter, a light area becomes lighter or elimi-
nated. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy/scanned-in image.
The background density for the copy function may not vary so much, depending on "Range correc-
tion background peak adjustment (05-532 to 534)" and "Range correction (05-570 to 572/693 to
695)".

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 50
05-609

Switching of Gamma Correction Table (Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)

Purpose
This code is used to switch the gamma table when paper is scanned from the ADF/RADF during the
copy/fax transmission/scan operation. This code is used to adjust the image quality when an original is 2
scanned from the ADF/RADF, to the one when the original is scanned from the original glass.

Description
As the set value is increased within the range between 1 and 4 except the default (0), the image
becomes lighter. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image becomes darker.

* Default: 0 (Equivalent to the medium density between when the set value is 3 and when it is 4)
* Acceptable values: 0 to 4 (1: Darkest, 4: Lightest)

Adjustment Timing
Use this code to adjust the image quality when necessary, if there is a visible difference in density when
the image is scanned from the original glass and when it is scanned from the ADF/RADF.

Caution
The original seen through the back of the page may be printed, and text handwritten with a pencil, light
text, or thin lines may not be printed clearly, when the ADF/RADF is used. Therefore, carefully perform
the adjustment, while checking the copy/scanned-in image.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 51
05-620 to 623/865 to 867

Sharpness Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function)

Purpose
Theses codes are used to reset the filtering processing (a process performed to enhance edge of
image data) intensity during the copy/scan operation, to make the image sharper or softer.
Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Sub code Applied to Function mode
05-620 - Text/photo mode Copy
05-621 - Photo mode, error diffusion
05-622 - Text mode
05-623 - Photo mode, dither
05-865 0 Text/photo mode, reproduction ratio: 25 to Scanner
40%
1 Text/photo mode, reproduction ratio: 41 to
80%
2 Text/photo mode, reproduction ratio: 81 to
100%
05-866 0 Text mode, reproduction ratio: 25 to 40%
1 Text mode, reproduction ratio: 41 to 80%
2 Text mode, reproduction ratio: 81 to 100%
05-867 0 Photo mode, reproduction ratio: 25 to 40%
1 Photo mode, reproduction ratio: 41 to 80%
2 Photo mode, reproduction ratio: 81 to 100%

Description
When these codes are used, the filtering intensity is specified by the one's and the ten's place. The
one's place is fixed in each original mode. As the ten's place is increased, a sharper image is printed.
As it is decreased, a softer image is printed. Also, as it is decreased, moir is less likely to occur.

One's place (filter shape):


Fixed value (Filter for each original mode selected)

Ten's place (sharpness intensity):


0 (sharpness at default)
1 to 9 (1: Softest, 9: Sharpest)

* Default: 05-620: EUR/UC: 1, JPN: 0, 05-621/623: 0, 05-865 to 867: 0


* Acceptable values (ten's place): 0 to 9

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, perform this adjustment to make the image sharper or softer during the
copy operation when necessary.
Perform this adjustment if insufficient sharpness adjustment causes degradation in the image quality
(moir, insufficient sharpness).

Caution
If the set value in the ten's place is too large, moir is more likely to occur on the printout. On the other
hand, if it is too small, the image may be blurred (insufficient sharpness). Therefore, perform this adjust-
ment to acquire the optimum image quality, while checking the printout.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 52
05-648/654/655

Adjustment of Smudged/Faint Text (Copy/Printer Function)

* Codes 05-645/655 are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose 2
These codes are used to prevent smudged/faint text when the copy/network printer function is used to
print.
Perform this adjustment in each function mode regarding the following items:

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Applied to Function mode
05-648 Text/photo mode Copy[
05-654 PS printing Printer^
05-655 PCL printing

Description
As the set value is increased, the faint text is suppressed. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the
smudged text is suppressed.
When performing this adjustment for the printer function, turn the main switch OFF and ON. Then
perform the printer operation to check the printout.

* Default (copy function): 05-648: 3


* Acceptable values: 0 to 4 (0: Maximum smudged text suppression, 4: Maximum faint text suppres-
sion)

* Default (printer function): 05-654/655: 5


* Acceptable values: 0 to 9 (0: Maximum faint text suppression, 9: Maximum smudged text suppres-
sion)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to suppress the smudged/faint text and thin lines, when the
copy/network printer function is used to print.

Caution
Note that the image quality and life of replacement parts may not meet the specifications when a value
other than the default is set.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 53
05-664/665

Upper Limit in Toner Saving Mode (Printer Function)

* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the upper limit of the printing density when the network printer function
is used to print in toner save mode. By making the printing density lower, toner can be saved.
Perform this adjustment in printer mode regarding the following items:

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
05-664 PS printing
05-665 PCL printing

Description
As the set value is increased, the printing density becomes higher in toner save mode. On the other
hand, as it is decreased, the printing density becomes lower.

* Default: 136
* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Lightest, 255: Darkest)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to reset the density during the print operation in toner save
mode.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 54
05-667/672/676/678

Adjustment of Image Density (Copy/Printer/FAX Function)

* Code 05-676 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* Code 05-676 is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.
* Code 05-678 is valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.
2
Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the dot size by specifying the width of laser pulse, which is assigned to
the beam levels. This is used for 4 divided smoothing (a process to reproduce smooth text and thin
lines) when the copy/printer/fax reception function is used to print. The primary scanning direction is
divided into four and the dot width is set at five levels including level "0."
Perform this adjustment in function mode regarding the following items:

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Function
Code Sub code Applied to
mode
05-667 0 Beam level 0/4 Copy
1 Beam level 1/4
2 Beam level 2/4
3 Beam level 3/4
4 Beam level 4/4
05-672 0 GDI printing, beam level 0/4 Printer
1 GDI printing, beam level 1/4
2 GDI printing, beam level 2/4
3 GDI printing, beam level 3/4
4 GDI printing, beam level 4/4
05-676 0 PS/PCL printing, beam level 0/4
1 PS/PCL printing, beam level 1/4
2 PS/PCL printing, beam level 2/4
3 PS/PCL printing, beam level 3/4
4 PS/PCL printing, beam level 4/4
05-678 0 Beam level 0/4 Fax
1 Beam level 1/4
2 Beam level 2/4
3 Beam level 3/4
4 Beam level 4/4

Description
As the set value is decreased, the beam width in the primary scanning direction becomes smaller and
dots are reproduced in smaller size.

* Default:
05-667-0: 0, 05-667-1: 19, 05-667-2: 25, 05-667-3: 31, 05-667-4: 44
05-672-0: 0, 05-672-1: 19, 05-672-2: 25, 05-672-3: 31, 05-672-4: 56
05-676-0: 0, 05-676-1: 19, 05-676-2: 25, 05-676-3: 31, 05-676-4: 44
05-678-0: 0, 05-678-1: 19, 05-678-2: 25, 05-678-3: 31, 05-678-4: 44
* Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Smallest dots, 255: Largest dots)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to make the dot size in the primary scanning direction smaller,
when copy/printer or fax function is used.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 55
Caution
Set the values to match the order of beam levels to the large and small set values. (Set the maxi-
mum value for beam level 4/4 and the minimum value for beam level 0/4.)
The adjustment of beam level 4 affects the dot size the most.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 56
3. Code in Setting Mode 08

List of 08 Setting Code

Code Content Page


08-202 Externally Installed Copy Counter / Controller 3-6
Device
08-203 Equipment Adjustment Mode Display 3-7
08-204 Auto-Clear Timer Setting 3-8
08-205 Auto Power Save Mode Timer Setting 3-9
08-206 Auto Shutoff Mode Timer Setting (Sleep Mode) 3-10
08-209 Default Setting of Filing Format when E-mailing 3-11 3
08-219 Default Setting of Filing Format when Storing Files 3-12
(Scanner Function)
08-224 to 228 Paper Size 3-13
08-229 to 242/244/245/337 to 341/471 Paper Size (Feeding/Widthwise Direction) 3-14
08-246 Clearing Copy Jobs at Auto Clear 3-15
08-250 Service Technician Telephone Number 3-16
08-251 Setting Value of PM Counter 3-17
08-252 Current Value of PM Counter Display / 0 Clearing 3-18
08-253 Error History Display 3-19
08-254 LT<->A4/LD<->A3 3-21
08-255 PFP Installation 3-22
08-258 FSMS Acceptance 3-23
08-260 Web Data Retention Period 3-24
08-261 Fixes the Paper Size Setting for the Bypass Tray 3-25
08-263 Administrator's Password 3-26
08-265 Maximum Data Capacity at E-mailing 3-27
08-266 Maximum Data Capacity at Internet FAX 3-28
08-273 Default Setting of Partial Size when Transmitting 3-29
E-mail
08-274 Default Setting of Partial Size when Transmitting 3-30
Internet FAX
08-276 Default Setting of Density Adjustment (Scanner 3-31
Function)
08-281 Default Setting of Resolution (Scanner Function) 3-32
08-283 Default Setting of Original Mode (Scanner Func- 3-33
tion)
08-284 Default Setting of Duplexing Mode (Scanner 3-34
Function)
08-285 Default Setting of Image Rotation Mode (Scanner 3-35
Function)
08-286 Default Setting of Original Size (Scanner Func- 3-36
tion)
08-290 to 293/296 to 299/978/979 Raw Print Job 3-37
08-300 Maximum Copy Count (Copy Function) 3-40
08-305 to 308 Print Counter Display (by Paper Size) 3-41
08-312 to 314 Scan Counter Display (by Paper Size) 3-43
08-315/316 Number of Transmitted/Received Pages in FAX 3-45
Function
08-320 to 323 Print Counter Display (By Large/Small Size) 3-46
08-327 to 329 Scan Counter Display 3-47
08-330/332 Display of Number of Transmitted/Received 3-48
Pages in FAX Function
08-335 Display of Total Number of Pages 3-49

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3-1
Code Content Page
08-345 Count Setting of Envelope (PM) 3-50
08-346 Count Setting of Large Size Paper (PM) 3-51
08-347/353 Definition Setting of Large Size Paper (PM / Fee 3-52
Charging System Counter)
08-348/349 Definition Setting of Thick Paper / Transparency 3-53
Film (PM)
08-352 Count Setting of Large Size Paper (Fee Charging 3-54
System Counter)
08-356 to 358/360/370/372/374/1411 Drawer Counter Display 3-55
08-361/1150/1158/1172/1174/1182/1198/1200/ PM Management Setting 3-56
1214/1224/1246/1250/1268/1298/1300/1312/
1314/1316/1320/1322/1328/1330/1332/1336
08-381 External Counter Function 3-59
08-388/389 Copying Total Counter 3-60
08-400 Fuser Unit Error Status Counter 3-61
08-404/405 Temperature Drop Setting in Ready State 3-62
08-407/411 Fuser Roller Temperature in Ready State 3-63
08-409/448 Fuser Roller Temperature in Energy Saver Mode 3-64
08-410/413/437/438/450 to 453/520/521 Fuser Roller Temperature during Printing (by 3-65
Paper Type)
08-414 Toner Density Correction Switching 3-66
08-424/425 Temperature Drop Switching Time Setting in 3-67
Ready State
08-433/800/801/802/804/896 Temperature Control Lower Limit 3-68
08-439 to 441/523/526 Pre-Running Time for First Printing (by Paper 3-69
Type)
08-455 Toner Supply Amount Correction 3-70
08-462 Setting for Switchback Operation to Copy Mixed- 3-71
Sized Original on RADF (A/B Format)
08-463 Light Control Status 3-73
08-476/536/537/539 Temperature Drop Setting during Printing 3-74
08-480 Default Setting of Paper Source 3-76
08-481 Automatic Paper Source Selection 3-77
08-482 Feeding Retry 3-78
08-483 Pre-Running Rotation of Polygonal Motor 3-79
08-486 Timing of Auto-Clearing of Polygonal Motor Pre- 3-80
Running Rotation
08-502 Error Diffusion and Dither Setting at Photo Mode 3-81
08-510 Automatic FAX Transmission 3-82
08-515/516 Temperature Setting during Warming-up 3-83
08-525/527/540/541 Temperature Drop Switching Time Setting during 3-84
Printing
08-535 Temperature Drop Control Setting during Printing 3-86
(Temperature/Time)
08-538 Default Setting in Density Adjustment Mode (Copy 3-87
Function)
08-550 Default Setting of Original Mode (Copy Function) 3-88
08-603 Setting for Automatic Duplexing Mode (Copy 3-89
Function)
08-604 APS/AMS Default Setting (Copy Function) 3-90
08-611 Book Type Original Priority (Copy Function) 3-91
08-615 Size Information of Main Memory and Page Mem- 3-92
ory
08-617 Print Setting without Department Code (Printer 3-93
Function)
08-618 Default Setting of RADF Original Size (Copy 3-94
Function)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-2
Code Content Page
08-631 Custom Mode Setting 3-95
08-638 Time Differences 3-96
08-641 Automatic Sorting Mode Setting (When Using 3-97
ADF/RADF) (Copy Function)
08-642 Default Setting of Sorter Mode (Copy Function) 3-98
08-649 Magazine Sort Setting (Copy Function) 3-99
08-650 2-in-1/4-in-1 Page Allocating Order Setting (Copy 3-101
Function)
08-655 Reset 05/08 Codes 3-102
08-660/661 Auto-Forwarding Setting of Received FAX/E-mail 3-103
08-666 BOX Partition Clearing 3-104
08-669 System All Clearing 3-105
08-672 Initialization of Department Management Informa- 3-106 3
tion
08-684/686 Rebuilding Databases 3-107
08-685 Duplex Printing by Alternate Circulation 3-108
08-690 CF Formatting 3-109
08-691 Template Function Setting 3-110
08-693 Initialization of NIC Information 3-111
08-695 Toner Remaining Check Function (Supports 3-112
Embedded IC chip)
08-698 Limit Function for the Number of Paper Exit 3-113
08-699 Limit Number Setting for Paper Exit 3-114
08-702/703/707/710/711/715 to 721/723/726 to TOSHIBA Remote Device Management System 3-115
730/772/773/780 to 790/796 (RDMS) Related Setting
08-712/713/714 250 sheets limitation for output pages 3-118
08-767 to 771/775 to 778 Service Notification Function Setting 3-119
08-805 to 809/814/818/819/826/864 to 867 Main Charger Grid Bias Correction (Copy/Printer/ 3-120
Fax Function)
08-830/868/869 Transfer DC Correction 3-122
08-831/870/871 Separation DC Output Correction 3-123
08-833 to 837/840/857 to 863 Developer Bias Correction (Copy/Printer/Fax 3-124
Function)
08-838 Recycled Toner Saving Control Switching 3-126
08-839 Correction by Temperature/Humidity 3-127
08-872/873/875 to 877/883/884 Laser Power Correction (Copy/Printer/Fax Func- 3-128
tion)
08-886 Temperature Drop Control Setting in Ready State 3-129
(Temperature/Time)
08-900/906 ROM Version Display 3-130
08-905 Process for Last Page (one-sided original) at 3-131
Duplex Copying
08-921/1951 FROM Internal Program/ FROM Basic Section 3-132
Software Version Display
08-922/923 Function Table Data Version / Language Data Ver- 3-133
sion Display
08-945 Port 9100 Bi-directional Communication ON/OFF 3-134
08-947 Initialization when Software is Upgraded 3-135
08-949 Drum Reverse Rotation Specification Page Set- 3-136
ting
08-970 Sound Setting When Switching to Energy Saver 3-137
Mode
08-971 Toner Near Empty Threshold Value 3-138
08-973 PCL Line Feed Code Setting 3-139
08-995 Equipment Number (Serial Number) Display 3-140
08-1002 Selection of NIC Board Status Information 3-141

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3-3
Code Content Page
08-1003 Ethernet Speed / Communication Speed Setting 3-142
08-1006 to 1010/1112 TCP/IP 3-143
08-1011/1012 IPX/SPX 3-144
08-1013 Availability of NCP Burst 3-145
08-1014/1015/1103 to 1105 AppleTalk 3-146
08-1017 to 1019 DNS 3-147
08-1020 DDNS Desired Level 3-148
08-1024/1025 Name of WINS Server 3-149
08-1026 to 1029 NetWare 3-150
08-1030 to 1032 HTTP 3-151
08-1037 to 1045/1100 to 1102/1111 SMTP 3-152
08-1046 to 1052/1097/1098 POP3 3-154
08-1055 FTP 3-155
08-1063/1065/1066/1069/1070/1099 SNMP 3-156
08-1073/1074 Raw TCP Print 3-158
08-1075 to 1077 LPD Print 3-159
08-1078 to 1088 IPP Print 3-160
08-1093 to 1096 NetWare Print 3-162
08-1114 Text Transmission of Internet FAX 3-163
08-1123 NT Domain ON/OFF Setting 3-164
08-1124 Workgroup Name 3-165
08-1141 Display of MAC Address 3-166
08-1144 Processing in the event of Memory Full Error 3-167
08-1149 Enhanced Bold for PCL6 3-168
08-1372 Heater and Energizing Time Accumulating 3-169
Counter Display / 0 Cleaning
08-1378 Fuser Roller Ready Temperature Time Accumulat- 3-170
ing Counter / 0 Cleaning
08-1380 Fuser Roller Printing Temperature Time Accumu- 3-171
lating Counter / 0 Cleaning
08-1382 Fuser Roller Energy Saving Temperature Time 3-172
Accumulating Counter Display / 0 Clearing
08-1385/1386/1388 Fuser Roller Paper Type Output Page Number 3-173
Counter / 0 Cleaning
08-1410 Toner Cartridge Driving Time Counter 3-174
08-1428 Forcible SRAM Backup Data All Clearing 3-175
08-1440 IP Conflict Detect 3-176
08-1447 IPP admin Name 3-177
08-1448 IPP admin Password 3-178
08-1449 IPP authentication method 3-179
08-1450 User name for IPP authentication 3-180
08-1451 Password for IPP authentication 3-181
08-1628 Drum Life Correction Switching of the Drum 3-182
Reverse/Forward Rotation Amount
08-1882 Initialization of the Scan Memory Area 3-183
08-1913 Function Clear LED Flashing 3-184
08-1952 to 1955 Controller ROM / Scanner ROM Program Version 3-185
Display
08-1960 to 1979 IP Address Range for IP Filter 3-186
08-1989 Enabling Server's IP Address acquired by DHCP 3-187
The Domain Name Server Option (6)
08-1990 Enabling Server's IP Address acquired by DHCP 3-188
The NetBIOS over TCP/IP Name Server Option
(44) = Primary and Secondary WINS Name
08-1991 Enable Serverfs IP Address acquired by DHCP 3-189
The Host Name Vender Extension Option (12)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-4
Code Content Page
08-1993 Enable Servers IP Address acquired by DHCP 3-190
The Simple Main Server Option (69) Simple Mail
Server Address
08-1994 Enable Servers IP Address acquired by DHCP 3-191
The POP3 Server Option (70) Post Office Server
Address
08-1996 Enable Servers IP Address acquired by DHCP 3-192
The SNTP Server Option (42) SNTP Server
Address

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3-5
08-202

Externally Installed Copy Counter / Controller Device

Purpose
The equipment can be equipped with external counters, such as a coin controller, copy key card, and
key copy counter. With any of these counters installed, it is required to use this code to have the equip-
ment detect a type of the counter installed.

Description
When this code is used, a type of counter installed on the equipment is detected.

0: No external copy counter/controller device


1: Coin controller
2: Copy key card
3: Key copy counter
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
When any of the above counters is installed on the equipment or when any of the above counter types
is changed, use this code to reset the set value.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-6
08-203

Equipment Adjustment Mode Display

Purpose
There are two types of modes; shipment adjustment mode used in the field after a factory shipment and
a line adjustment mode used before a factory shipment. This code is used to check in which adjustment
mode the equipment is set.
Since the shipment adjustment mode is set for the field, it is not necessary to perform this code. Leave
the default (factory shipment adjustment mode).

Description
When this code is used, the adjustment mode of the equipment (adjustment mode for factory shipment
3
/ line adjustment mode) can be checked.

0: For factory shipment


1: For line
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the adjustment mode of the equipment.

Caution
Leave the default ("0" for factory shipment) for this code.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3-7
08-204

Auto-Clear Timer Setting

Purpose
If no button is pressed for a certain period of time during or after the copy operation, etc., the auto-clear
function will automatically reset the current copy settings to the default settings and display the basic
screen. This code is used to reset a desired period of time until the auto-clear function starts up.

Description
When this code is used, a period of time from the last button operation until the start-up of the auto-
clear function is reset. As the set value is increased, the period of time until the auto-clear function
starts up becomes longer. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the period of time becomes shorter.
When "0" is set, the auto-clear function is disabled.

0: Auto-clear function disabled


1: 15 seconds 6: 90 seconds 11: 180 seconds
2: 30 seconds 7: 105 seconds 12: 210 seconds
3: 45 seconds 8: 120 seconds 13: 240 seconds
4: 60 seconds 9: 135 seconds 14: 270 seconds
5: 75 seconds 10: 150 seconds 15: 300 seconds
* Default: 3 (45 seconds)

* On the e-STUDIO165/205, the period of time until the auto-clear function starts up is set according
to the following operation:
To set on the control panel:
[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [GENERAL SETTINGS] --> [TIMERS] -->
[AUTO CLEAR]
To set on the TopAccess (only when the Network Printer Kit is installed):
[Administration] --> [Setup] --> [General] --> [Energy Save] --> [Auto Clear]

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the period of time until the auto-clear function starts up or
to disable the auto-clear function.

Caution
When "0" is set, the auto-clear function is disabled. The current settings (displayed on the control
panel) applied to the last operation are retained until the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-8
08-205

Auto Power Save Mode Timer Setting

Purpose
Energy saver mode is intended to automatically lower the temperature of the fuser unit in order to
reduce power consumption, when the equipment has been in an idle state for a certain period of time.
This code is used to enable energy saver mode by resetting a period of time until the equipment
switches to energy saver mode.

Description
When this code is used, the period of time from when the equipment is used last time to when the
3
equipment switches to energy saver mode is reset. As the set value is increased, the period of time
until the equipment switches to energy saver mode becomes longer. On the other hand, as it is
decreased, the period of time becomes shorter. In addition, when "0" is set, energy saver mode is dis-
abled.

e-STUDIO163/203:
0: Disabled
1: Reserved 7: Reserved 13: 25 minutes 19: 55 minutes 25: 110 minutes
2: 1 minute 8: 5 minutes 14: 30 minutes 20: 60 minutes 26: 120 minutes
3: Reserved 9: Reserved 15: 35 minutes 21: 70 minutes 27: 150 minutes
4: 2 minutes 10: 10 minutes 16: 40 seconds 22: 80 minutes 28: 180 minutes
5: Reserved 11: 15 minutes 17: 45 seconds 23: 90 minutes 29: 210 minutes
6: 4 minutes 12: 20 minutes 18: 50 minutes 24: 100 minutes 30: 240 minutes
* Default: 11

e-STUDIO165/205:
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
* Default: 1
* The period of time until the equipment switches to energy saver mode is set according to the fol-
lowing operation:
The period of time to set is the same as for the e-STUDIO163/203.
To set on the control panel:
[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [GENERAL SETTINGS] -->
[TIMERS] --> [AUTO POWER SAVE]
To set on the TopAccess (only when the Network Printer Kit is installed):
[Administration] --> [Setup] --> [General] --> [Energy Save] --> [Auto Power Save]

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset a period of time until the equipment switches to energy saver mode.

Caution
If the period of time set for "Auto power save mode timer setting (05-205)" is equal to or longer than the
one set for "Auto shutoff mode timer setting (Sleep mode) (08-206)", it will be overridden by the period
of time until the equipment switches to sleep mode. The equipment will not switch to energy saver
mode.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3-9
08-206

Auto Shutoff Mode Timer Setting (Sleep Mode)

Purpose
Sleep mode is intended to automatically turn the fuser unit OFF in order to reduce power consumption,
when the equipment has been in an idle state for a certain period of time. This code is used to enable
sleep mode by resetting a period of time until the equipment switches to sleep mode.
However, power is supplied to the optional boards including the FAX Kit and Network Printer Kit in
sleep mode, therefore, the equipment starts up when a fax is received or a request to print from the net-
work is made.

Description
When this code is used, the period of time from when the equipment is used last time to when the
equipment switches to sleep mode is reset. As the set value is increased, the period of time until the
equipment switches to sleep mode becomes longer. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the period of
time becomes shorter. In addition, when "23" is set for the e-STUDIO163/203 and 0 for the e-
STUDIO165/205, sleep mode is disabled.

e-STUDIO163/203:
0: 3 minutes 6: 30 minutes 12: 60 minutes 18: 120 minutes
1: 5 minutes 7: 35 minutes 13: 70 minutes 19: 150 minutes
2: 10 minutes 8: 40 minutes 14: 80 minutes 20: 180 minutes
3: 15 minutes 9: 45 minutes 15: 90 minutes 21: 210 minutes
4: 20 minutes 10: 50 minutes 16: 100 seconds 22: 240 minutes
5: 25 minutes 11: 55 minutes 17: 110 seconds 23: Disabled
* Default: 3

e-STUDIO165/205:
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
* Default: 1
* The period of time until the equipment switches to sleep mode is set according to the following
operation:
The period of time to set is the same as for the e-STUDIO163/203.
To set on the control panel:
[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [GENERAL SETTINGS] -->
[TIMERS] --> [AUTO SLEEP]
To set on the TopAccess (only when the Network Printer Kit is installed):
[Administration] --> [Setup] --> [General] --> [Energy Save] --> [Sleep/Auto Shut Off]

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset a period of time until the equipment switches to sleep mode.

Caution
If the period of time set for "Auto power save mode timer setting (05-205)" is equal to or longer than the
one set for "Auto shutoff mode timer setting (Sleep mode) (08-206)", it will be overridden by the period
of time until the equipment switches to sleep mode. The equipment will not switch to energy saver
mode.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 10
08-209

Default Setting of Filing Format when E-mailing

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the file format, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen and
used by priority, when the scanned original data is sent by e-mail.
3
Description
When this code is used, the file format, which is used by priority, is reset.

0: TIFF (Multi)
1: PDF
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the file format, which is used by priority, when the
scanned original data is sent by e-mail.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 11
08-219

Default Setting of Filing Format when Storing Files (Scanner Function)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the file format, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen and
used by priority, when the scanner function is used to store the scanned original data in a shared folder.

Description
When this code is used, the file format, which is used by priority, is reset.

0: TIFF (Multi)
1: PDF
2: Reserved
3: TIFF (Single)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the file format, which is used by priority, when the
scanned original data is stored in a shared folder.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 12
08-224 to 228

Paper Size

* Codes 08-225, 227 and 228 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to have the equipment detect the size of paper loaded in each drawer and the
bypass tray. This allows the APS (Automatic Paper Selection), paper transport and jam detection to be
performed, depending on paper size.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
3
Code Applied to
08-224 Paper size for the bypass tray
08-225 Paper size for the drawer
08-226 Paper size for the PFU drawer
08-227 Paper size for the PFP upper drawer
08-228 Paper size for the PFP lower drawer

Description
When these codes are used, the equipment detects the size of paper loaded in each paper source.

Set value = Size of paper to be loaded

0: A3 4: B4 8: LT-R 12:COMP
1: A4 5: B5 9: LD 13: FOLIO
2: A4-R 6: B5-R 10: LG 14: Non-standard
3: A5-R 7: LT 11: ST-R 15: Postcard
* 14 and 15 can be selected only for the paper size for the bypass tray (08-224).

* Default:
Bypass tray: 14 (No particular size is specified)
Drawer: UC: 7, Others: 1
PFU Drawer: UC: 7, Others: 1
PFP upper Drawer: UC: 7, Others: 1
PFP lower Drawer: UC: 7, Others: 1

* The paper size is set on the control panel according to the following operation:
e-STUDIO163/203:
Press [DRAWER] + [COPY] for two seconds --> [DRAWER] --> [COPY]
e-STUDIO165/205:
[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [GENERAL SETTINGS] -->
[DRAWER SIZE]

Setting Timing
Use these codes to reset the paper size for each drawer.

Caution
If the paper size different from the actual size of paper loaded is set for 08-225 to 228, a jam may occur
and the back of paper may be smudged.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 13
08-229 to 242/244/245/337 to 341/471

Paper Size (Feeding/Widthwise Direction)

* Codes 08-337 to 341 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to have the equipment detect the size of each type of paper in mm in the feeding
direction and widthwise direction.
The values set here are also used to define the range of an image printed on paper.
* Paper feeding is controlled based on the paper size selected; therefore, the actual paper size must
correspond with the set value. Unless the actual paper size corresponds with the set value, a jam
may be generated during the paper feed operation.

Description
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Default Acceptable
Code Applied to
(Feeding/ widthwise) value
08-229 Paper size (A3-R) 420/297 140 to 432
08-230 Paper size (A4-R) 297/210
08-231 Paper size (A5-R) 210/148
08-232 Paper size (B4) 364/257
08-233 Paper size (B5-R) 257/182
08-234 Paper size (LT-R) 279/216
08-235 Paper size (LD) 432/279
08-236 Paper size (LG) 356/216
08-237 Paper size (ST-R) 216/140
08-238 Paper size (COMPUTER) 356/257
08-239 Paper size (FOLIO) 330/210
08-240 Paper size (13 LG) 330/216
08-241 Paper size (8.5 x 8.5) 216/216
08-242 Paper size (Non-standard) 432/279 105 to 432
08-244 Paper size (8K) 390/270 140 to 432
08-245 Paper size (16K-R) 270/195 140 to 432
08-337 Paper size (Envelope: COM10-R) 241/105 105 to 432
08-338 Paper size (Envelope: DL-R) 220/110 105 to 432
08-339 Paper size (Envelope: Monarch-R) 191/98 98 to 432
08-340 Paper size (Envelope: CHO-3-R) 235/120 105 to 432
08-341 Paper size (Envelope: YOU-3-R) 235/105 105 to 432
08-471 Paper size (Postcard) 148/100 100 to 432
* The value for each code in the feeding direction and widthwise direction varies according to sub
code. (0: Feeding direction, 1: Widthwise direction)

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use a special paper size (other than that listed in the above table) in each
drawer (this operation is not guaranteed).

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 14
08-246

Clearing Copy Jobs at Auto Clear

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to clear the copy job entered, when the auto-clear period of
time passes while the copy operation is suspended.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to automatically clear the copy job is reset.

0: Does not clear


1: Clears
3
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to automatically clear the copy job.

Caution
No copy job is cleared even if the auto-clear period of time passes during the menu operation.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 15
08-250

Service Technician Telephone Number

Purpose
When a service call appears, a telephone number of a service technician can be displayed on the con-
trol panel. No telephone number is displayed by default. This code is used to enter and display the tele-
phone number.

Description
When this code is used, a telephone number of a service technician is entered, and displayed on the
screen when a service call appears.

Set value = Telephone number of a service technician

* Acceptable value: 20-digit numeric value


* Default: 0 (No telephone number is displayed)

Setting Timing
Use this code to display the telephone number when a service call appears.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 16
08-251

Setting Value of PM Counter

Purpose
The Preventive Maintenance (PM) needs to be performed to clean the parts, lubricate the driving units
and replace consumables. This code is used to specify the PM cycle (copy counts). At the moment
when the PM counter value of "Current value of PM counter display/0 clearing (08-252)" reaches the
set value for the code, the message will appear, prompting for the PM.

Description
When this code is used, the PM cycle (copy counts) is shown up to an 8-digit numeric value.
3
Set value = Copy counts prompting for the PM

0: Message will not appear, prompting for the PM


1 to 99999999 (copy counts)
* Default: e-STUDIO163: JPN: 0, Others: 72,000
e-STUDIO165: JPN: 0, Others: 72,000
e-STUDIO205: JPN: 0, Others: 90,000

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the PM cycle.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 17
08-252

Current Value of PM Counter Display / 0 Clearing

Purpose
The PM counter is intended to count the number of copies as a guide for estimating the next PM (Pre-
ventive Maintenance) timing. This code is used to display and to check the current PM counter value for
estimating the general PM timing. In addition, when "0" is set after the PM is performed, the counter will
be reset to 0 and incremented again, which helps to estimate the next PM timing.

Description
When this code is used, the current value of the PM counter is shown up to an 8-digit numeric value.
Note that only "0" can be manually entered to reset the PM counter to 0, after the PM is performed.

0: Clear the counter


1 to 99999999 (copy counts)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the current counter value to 0, after the PM is performed.

Caution
Reset the counter to 0, only after performing the PM. Otherwise, the next PM timing cannot be accu-
rately estimated. The image quality may be reduced and some failure may occur in the equipment.
The PM counter value is stored in the SRAM board.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 18
08-253

Error History Display

Purpose
During the equipment operation, if an error occurs, the type of error, time when the error occurred, cur-
rent reproduction ratio and paper source for recording paper, etc., are stored as error data. This code is
used to display data for the last 8 errors on the control panel in order to check the status of the equip-
ment in the even of an error.

Description
When this code is used, data for the last 8 errors are listed on the screen. Error data is shown, as indi-
cated below:
3

EA10 03 07 26 17 5 32 064 064 2 3 6 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0


Error code Y/M/D/H/M/S MMM NNN A BCD EF H I J L O
(4 digits) (12 digits) (3 digits) (3 digits) (11 digits)

* The table below shows the descriptions of the symbols:


MMM Reproduction ratio in the primary scanning direction (in hexadecimal) (M x 256) + (M x 16) + M
NNN Reproduction ratio in the secondary scanning direction (in hexadecimal) (N x 256) + (N x 16) + N
A Paper source
0: Not used 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: PFP upper drawer 4: Not used 5: PFP lower drawer 6: Not used
7: Upper drawer 8: Lower drawer
B Paper size code
0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7- A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5
A: FOLIO/COMP B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG H: A6-R I: Post card J: 8.5"SQ K: Unused
L: Unused M: 8K N: 16K-R O: 16K P: COM10 (Envelope) Q: DL (Envelope) R: Monarch (Envelope)
S: CHO-3 (Envelope) T: YOU-4 (Envelope) Z: Not used
C Sort mode/staple mode
0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple 8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch
D ADF mode
0: Not used 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED
E APS/AMS mode
0: Not used 1: APS 2: AMS
F Duplex mode
0: Not specified 1: Book 2: Double-sided /simplex printing 4: Double-sided/Duplex printing
8: Single-sided/ Duplex printing
H Image shift
0: Not used 1: Book-type 2: Left 4: Right
I Editing
0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Negative/Positive reversal
J Edge erase/Dual-page
0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page
L Function
0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission 3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing
4: Unused 5: Printing/List print 6: Scan/E-mail transmission
O Mode
2: Black

* The error records displayed on the e-STUDIO163/203 are switched using the [ZOOM] ([25%] /
[[200%]] button.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the status of the equipment in the even of an error, for the purpose of analyzing
a cause for the error.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 19
Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 20
08-254

LT<->A4/LD<->A3

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
When the network printer function is used to print, this code is used to specify whether or not to print on
a different size of paper, unless a specified size of paper is available.

Description
3
When this code is used, whether or not to print a document, which should be printed on LT/LD-sized
paper, on A4/A3-sized paper, is specified, unless LT/LD-sized paper is available, and vice versa.

0: Enabled
1: Disabled (A message will appear to prompt a user to use a specified size of paper.)
* Default: 0

* This is set on the TopAccess according to the following operation:


[Administration] --> [Setup] --> [Printer] --> [LT < --> A4/LD <--> A3]

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to specify how to print out a document when the network printer
function is used to print, unless a specified size of paper is available.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 21
08-255

PFP Installation

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the installation condition of the optional PFP (Paper Feed Pedestal).
The PFP is automatically recognized; therefore, use this code in the following cases:

Case 1:
To reset from "2: PFP dual-drawer type installed" to "1: PFP single-drawer type installed"
(When only the 2nd drawer of the PFP is broken, etc.)

Case 2:
To forcibly set to "4: Not installed" (When the 1st drawer or entire PFP is broken, etc.)

Case 3:
To install the new PFP from "4: Not installed"
(When a replacement unit is installed in the condition in Case 2, etc.)

Description
When this code is use, the installation condition of the PFP is reset.

0: Automatic (Detects installation condition automatically)


1: PFP single-drawer type installed
2: PFP dual-drawer type installed
3: Reserved
4: Not installed
* Default: 0

* The PFP dual-drawer type is installed while 1 is set, 2 is automatically replaced with 1 at power-
on.

Setting Timing
Use this code when the new PFP is installed.

Caution
If "0: Automatic is not set, perform this code according to the actual installation, when the PFP
installation condition is reset (Cases 1 to 3 in Purpose). If this code is not performed, the PFP is not
recognized as a setup product.
Regarding Case 3 in Purpose, remove the failed unit (disconnect electrically), in order to install a
replacement unit in the condition of Case 2. Then set to "0: Automatic (Detects installation condition
automatically)" and install the replacement unit for the PFP.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 22
08-258

FSMS Acceptance

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
The utility software, FSMS (Field Service Manager System) allows a service technician to download
firmware to update, via a PC connected to the equipment. Before that, it is necessary to permit the
FSMS connection.
3
Description
When this code is used, whether or not to permit the FSMS connection is specified. In addition, a type
of communication interface is selected.

0: Prohibited
1: Permitted (serial connection only)
2: Permitted (serial and USB connections)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to permit the FSMS connection, in order to use the FSMS to update firmware.

Caution
Connect the FSMS to the equipment while "1" is set, when the USB is used. (The communication inter-
face is automatically switched to the USB connection during communications)

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 23
08-260

Web Data Retention Period

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
When the equipment has been in an idle state for a certain period of time during the entry operation on
the TopAccess, data, which is being entered, is automatically reset. This code is used to set the period
of time until data is reset.

Description
When this code is used, the timeout period, which is being entered on the TopAccess, is reset. If a tim-
eout occurs, data, which is being entered, is reset.

Set value = Timeout period

0 to 999 (minutes)
* Default: 10 (minutes)

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the period of time until the value, which is being entered
on the TopAccess, reaches the timeout and is reset.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 24
08-261

Fixes the Paper Size Setting for the Bypass Tray

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to fix the paper size for the bypass tray to a specified size.

Description
When this code is used, the operation to fix a paper size for the bypass tray is set.
With the main switch turned OFF or the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button pressed, unless a paper size is
fixed, [Non-standard] is set. If it is fixed, the paper size set for code 08-224 is set.

0: Size not fixed (bypass non-standard mode)


3
1: Size fixed (bypass fixed mode)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to fix the paper size for the bypass tray to a specified size.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 25
08-263

Administrator's Password

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
A user (or an administrator of the equipment) authorized to access the equipment management func-
tions on the TopAccess, is limited. This code is used to display the administrator's password, which
needs to be entered, in order to access the management functions.

Description
When this code is used, the administrator's password is displayed.

Set value = Administrator's password (6- to 10- digit numeric value)

* Acceptable values: 0000000000 to 9999999999


* Default: 123456

* The administrator's password is set on the TopAccess according to the following operation:
[Administration] --> [Setup] --> [General] --> [Administrators Password]

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the administrator's password.

Caution
If a new password is registered or reset, remember to inform the equipment administrator of the new
password.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 26
08-265

Maximum Data Capacity at E-mailing

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the maximum data capacity when e-mail is transmitted in the scan opera-
tion.
If the transmitted data exceeds the maximum data capacity set for this code, an error message, which
shows exceeding file capacity, appears. 3

Description
When this code is used, the maximum data capacity is reset, when e-mail is transmitted in the scan
operation.

2 to 30 (Mbytes)
* Default: 30 (Mbytes)

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the maximum data capacity when e-mail is transmitted in
the scan operation.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required. As the set value is decreased, the error mes-
sage is more likely to appear due to an excess of file capacity.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 27
08-266

Maximum Data Capacity at Internet FAX

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the FAX Kit, Network Printer Kit and External Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the maximum data capacity when a fax is transmitted through the Internet.
If the transmitted data exceeds the maximum capacity set for this code, an error message, which shows
exceeding file capacity, appears.

Description
When this code is used, the maximum data capacity is reset, when a fax is transmitted through the
Internet.

2 to 30 (Mbytes)
* Default: 30 (Mbytes)

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the maximum data capacity when a fax is transmitted
through the Internet.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required. As the set value is decreased, the error mes-
sage is more likely to appear due to an excess of file capacity.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 28
08-273

Default Setting of Partial Size when Transmitting E-mail

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the FAX Kit, Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External
Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
When e-mail is transmitted in the scan operation, it can be divided into multiple pieces of e-mail on a
2Mbyte-basis at the maximum. This code is used to specify the initial value of the partial size selection
button, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen and used by priority.
3
Description
When this code is used, the e-mail transmission partial size is reset.

0: Not divided
1: 64k bytes
2: 128k bytes
3: 256k bytes
4: 512k bytes
5: 1024k bytes
6: 2048k bytes
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the initial value of the e-mail transmission partial size, when e-mail is transmitted
in the scan operation.

Caution
If "0 (Not divided)" is set, e-mail is transmitted as a piece of e-mail without being divided. The maximum
acceptable transmission capacity is determined for "Maximum data capacity at e-mailing (08-265)" (2 to
30Mbytes).

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 29
08-274

Default Setting of Partial Size when Transmitting Internet FAX

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the FAX Kit, Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External
Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
When e-mail is transmitted through the Internet, it can be divided into multiple pieces of e-mail on a
2Mbyte-basis at the maximum. This code is used to specify the initial value of the partial size selection
button, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen and used by priority.

Description
When this code is used, the Internet FAX transmission partial size is reset.

0: Not divided
1: 256k bytes
2: 512k bytes
3: 1024k bytes
4: 2048k bytes
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the initial value of the e-mail transmission partial size, when e-mail is transmitted
through the Internet.

Caution
If "0 (Not divided)" is set, e-mail is transmitted as a piece of e-mail without being divided. The maximum
acceptable transmission capacity is determined for "Maximum data capacity at Internet FAX (08-266)"
(2 to 30Mbytes).

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 30
08-276

Default Setting of Density Adjustment (Scanner Function)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the initial value of the density adjustment button, which is used as the
default by priority, when the scanner function is used.
3
Description
When this code is used, the position of the density adjustment button, which is used by priority, during
the scan operation, is reset.

0: Automatic density
3: Step -3
4: Step -2
5: Step -1
6: Step 0 (center)
7: Step +1
8: Step +2
9: Step +3
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the position of the density adjustment button, which is
used by priority, during the scan operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 31
08-281

Default Setting of Resolution (Scanner Function)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the scanning resolution, which is used as the default by priority, when the
scanner function is used.

Description
When this code is used, the scanning resolution, which is used by priority, during the scan operation, is
reset.

0: 150 dpi
1: 200 dpi
2: 300 dpi
3: 400 dpi
4: 600 dpi
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the scanning resolution, which is used by priority, during
the scan operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 32
08-283

Default Setting of Original Mode (Scanner Function)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the original mode, which is used as the default by priority, when the scan-
ner function is used.
3
Description
When this code is used, the original mode, which is used by priority, during the scan operation, is reset.

0: Text
1: Text/photo
2: Photo
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the original mode, which is used by priority, during the
scan operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 33
08-284

Default Setting of Duplexing Mode (Scanner Function)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the duplexing mode, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen
and used by priority, when the scanner function is used.

Description
When this code is used, the duplexing mode, which is used by priority, during the scan operation, is
reset.

0: Single
1: Book (left/right margin)
2: Tablet (top/bottom margin)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the duplexing mode, which is used by priority during the
scan operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 34
08-285

Default Setting of Image Rotation Mode (Scanner Function)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the image rotation mode, which is displayed as the default on the setting
screen and used by priority, when the scanner function is used.
3
Description
When this code is used, the image rotation mode, which is used by priority, during the scan operation, is
reset.

0: 0 degree (OFF)
1: 90 degrees (ON)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the image rotation mode, which is used by priority, during
the scan operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 35
08-286

Default Setting of Original Size (Scanner Function)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the original size, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen
and used by priority, when the scanner function is used.

Description
When this code is used, the original size, which is used by priority, during the scan operation, is reset.

0: Automatic
1: Size mixed
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the original size, which is used by priority, during the
scan operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 36
08-290 to 293/296 to 299/978/979

Raw Print Job

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to specify the print properties, which are used, when a Raw print job is sent to
the printer.
The Raw print job refers to a print job, which does not contain any special print job information, such as
a print job sent to the printer when the printer driver (PCL or PS) is not used.
3
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
08-290 Duplex
08-291 Paper Size
08-292 Paper Type
08-293 Paper Orientation
08-296 Number of Form Lines
08-297 PCL Font Pitch
08-298 PCL Font Size
08-299 PCL Font Number
08-978 Drawer
08-979 PCL Symbol Set

Description
08-290: Duplex
This code is used to specify duplex printing for the Raw print job.
0: Valid (duplex) 1: Invalid (simplex)
* Default: 1

08-291: Paper Size


This code is used to specify a paper size for the Raw print job.
0: LD 4: ST 8: Reserved 12: 13 LG
1: LG 5: A3 9: B4
2: LT 6: A4 10: B5
3: COMP 7: A5 11: FOLIO
* Default: UC: 2, EUR/JPN: 6

08-292: Paper Type


This code is used to specify a paper type for the Raw print job.
0: Plain paper
1: Thick paper 1
2: Thick paper 2
3: Reserved
4: Transparency film
* Default: 0

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 37
08-293: Paper Orientation
This code is used to specify a paper orientation for the Raw print job.
0: Portrait
1: Landscape
* Default: 0

08-296: Number of Form Lines


This code is used to specify the line feed width.
500 to 12,800: Unit: 1/100 point (point = 1/72 inch)
* Default: 1,200 (12 points)

08-297: PCL Font Pitch


This code is used to specify the number of characters per inch, when the fixed-pitch font is used.
44 to 9,999: Unit: 1/100 CPI (character per inch)
* Default: 1,000 (10 CPI)

08-298: PCL Font Size


This code is used specify the font size, when the proportional font is used
400 to 99,975: Unit: 1/100 point (point = 1/72 inch)
* Default: 1,200 (12 points)

08-299: PCL Font Number


This code is used to specify a PCL font number used for the Raw print job.
0 to 79
* Default: 0 (Courier is used.)

08-978: Drawer Display


This code is used to specify a drawer displayed by default for the Raw print job.
0: AUTO
1: Drawer
2: PFU drawer
3: PFP upper drawer
4: PFP lower drawer
* Default: 0

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 38
08-979: Symbol Set Display
This code is used to specify a drawer displayed by default for the Raw print job.
0: Roman-8 20: Pi Font
1: ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 21: Legal
2: ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 22: ISO 4: United Kingdom
3: ISO 8859/9 Latin 5 23: ISO 6:ASCII
4: PC-8, Code Page 437 24: ISO 11
5: PC-8 D/N, Danish/Norwegian 25: ISO 15: Italian
6: PC-850, Multilingual 26: ISO 17
7: PC-852, Latin2 27: ISO 21: German
8: PC-8 Turkish 28: ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian
9: Windows 3.1 Latin 1 29: ISO 69: French
10: Windows 3.1 Latin 2 30: Windows 3.0 Latin 1
11: Windows 3.1 Latin 5 31: MC Text 3
12: DeskTop 32: PC Cyrillic
13: PS Text 33: ITC Zapf Dingbats
14: Ventura International 34: ISO 8859/10 Latin 6
15: Ventura US 35: PC-775
16: Microsoft Publishing 36: PC-1004
17: Math-8 37: Symbol
18: PS Math 38: Windows Baltic
19: Ventura Math 39: Wingdings
* Default: 0

* The above Raw print jobs are set on the TopAccess according to the following operation:
[Administration] --> [Setup] --> [Printer]

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to reset the print properties for the Raw print job.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 39
08-300

Maximum Copy Count (Copy Function)

Purpose
This code is used to specify the maximum copy count when multiple copies are made per job.

Description
When this code is used, the maximum copy count per job is specified.

Set value = Maximum copy count

0: 999
1: 99
2: 9
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the maximum copy count per job.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 40
08-305 to 308

Print Counter Display (by Paper Size)

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to check by displaying the current values (print counts) of the print counters
(copy counter, Fax counter, printer counter and list counter) by paper size. This is done according to
"Count setting of large size paper (08-352)" and "Definition setting of large size paper (08-353)."

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
3
[Copy counter (by paper size): Print counts]
Code Sub code Applied to Sub code Applied to Function mode
08-305 0 A3 9 LT Copy
1 A4 10 ST
2 A5 11 COMP
3 A6 12 13 LG
4 B4 13 8.5 x 8.5
5 B5 14 16K
6 FOLIO 15 8K
7 LD 16 Others
8 LG

[Printer counter (by paper size): Print counts]


Code Sub code Applied to Sub code Applied to Function mode
08-306 0 A3 9 LT Printer
1 A4 10 ST
2 A5 11 COMP
3 A6 12 13" LG
4 B4 13 8.5" x 8.5"
5 B5 14 16K
6 FOLIO 15 8K
7 LD 16 Others
8 LG

[List counter (by paper size): Print counts]


Code Sub code Applied to Sub code Applied to Function mode
08-307 0 A3 9 LT Printer
1 A4 10 ST
2 A5 11 COMP
3 A6 12 13" LG
4 B4 13 8.5" x 8.5"
5 B5 14 16K
6 FOLIO 15 8K
7 LD 16 Others
8 LG

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 41
[Fax counter (by paper size): Print counts]
Code Sub code Applied to Sub code Applied to Function mode
08-308 0 A3 9 LT Fax
1 A4 10 ST
2 A5 11 COMP
3 A6 12 13" LG
4 B4 13 8.5" x 8.5"
5 B5 14 16K
6 FOLIO 15 8K
7 LD 16 Others
8 LG

Description
When these codes are used, the current value of each print counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric
value.

* 0 to 99999999
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the print count is
calculated.

Caution
Although the digital keys are used to enter the counter value, basically do not enter the counter value.
Once it is entered, there is no way to undo it.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 42
08-312 to 314

Scan Counter Display (by Paper Size)

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to check by displaying the current values (scan counts) of the scan counters
(copy counter, network counter and Fax counter) by paper size.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

[Copy counter (by paper size): Scan counts] 3


Code Sub code Applied to Sub code Applied to Function mode
08-312 0 A3 9 LT Copy
1 A4 10 ST
2 A5 11 COMP
3 A6 12 13" LG
4 B4 13 8.5" x 8.5"
5 B5 14 16K
6 FOLIO 15 8K
7 LD 16 Others
8 LG

[Scanner counter (by paper size): Scan counts]


Code Sub code Applied to Sub code Applied to Function mode
08-313 0 A3 9 LT Scanner
1 A4 10 ST
2 A5 11 COMP
3 A6 12 13" LG
4 B4 13 8.5" x 8.5"
5 B5 14 16K
6 FOLIO 15 8K
7 LD 16 Others
8 LG

[Fax counter (by paper size): Scan counts]


Code Sub code Applied to Sub code Applied to Function mode
08-314 0 A3 9 LT Fax
1 A4 10 ST
2 A5 11 COMP
3 A6 12 13" LG
4 B4 13 8.5" x 8.5"
5 B5 14 16K
6 FOLIO 15 8K
7 LD 16 Others
8 LG

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 43
Description
When these codes are used, the current value of each scan counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric
value.

* 0 to 99999999
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the scan count is
calculated.

Caution
Use these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the scan count is
calculated.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 44
08-315/316

Number of Transmitted/Received Pages in FAX Function

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to check by displaying the current values (transmission/reception counts) of the
Fax communication counters by paper size.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

[Fax transmission counter (by paper size): Fax transmission counts] 3


Code Sub code Applied to Sub code Applied to Function mode
08-315 0 A3 9 LT Fax
1 A4 10 ST
2 A5 11 COMP
3 A6 12 13" LG
4 B4 13 8.5" x 8.5"
5 B5 14 16K
6 FOLIO 15 8K
7 LD 16 Others
8 LG

[Fax reception counter (by paper size): Fax reception counts]


Code Sub code Applied to Sub code Applied to Function mode
08-316 0 A3 9 LT Fax
1 A4 10 ST
2 A5 11 COMP
3 A6 12 13" LG
4 B4 13 8.5" x 8.5"
5 B5 14 16K
6 FOLIO 15 8K
7 LD 16 Others
8 LG

Description
When these codes are used, the current value of the Fax transmission/reception counter is shown up to
an 8 digit numeric value.

* 0 to 99999999
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the Fax transmis-
sion/reception count is calculated.

Caution
Although the digital keys are used to enter the counter value, basically do not enter the counter value.
Once it is entered, there is no way to undo it.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 45
08-320 to 323

Print Counter Display (By Large/Small Size)

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
The print counters include a copy counter, a printer counter, a list counter and a Fax counter. Each
counter is intended to accumulate print counts by paper size (small/large size). These codes are used
to display and check the current value of each print counter.
* The print counters can also be displayed by the operation on the control panel.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Sub code Applied to Function mode
08-320 0 Copy counter (large size) Fax
1 Copy counter (small size)
2 Copy counter (total)
08-321 0 Printer counter (large size) Printer
1 Printer counter (small size)
2 Printer counter (total)
08-322 0 List counter (large size)
1 List counter (small size)
2 List counter (total)
08-323 0 Fax counter (large size) Fax
1 Fax counter (small size)
2 Fax counter (total)

Description
When these codes are used, the current value of each counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric value.

* 0 to 99999999
* Default: 0

Counting conditions are as follows.


Small size: The print counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of small size paper
(designated paper size other than large size paper) is printed.
Large size: The print counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of large size paper is
printed.
However, the print counter is incremented by 2, every time a sheet of large size
paper is printed.
* Large size paper setting (08-353)
* Large size paper double count setting (08-352)
Total: The sum of large size and small size paper is counted.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the print count is
calculated.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 46
08-327 to 329

Scan Counter Display

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
The scan counters include a copy counter, a scanner counter, and a Fax counter. Each counter is
intended to accumulate scan counts by paper size (small/large size). These codes are used to display
and check the current value of each scan counter.
* Scan counts of each counter can be displayed by the operation on the control panel. However, these
codes are used to display scan counts by small/large size.
3
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Sub code Applied to Function mode
08-327 0 Copy counter (large size) Copy
1 Copy counter (small size)
2 Copy counter (total)
08-328 0 Fax counter (large size) Fax
1 Fax counter (small size)
2 Fax counter (total)
08-329 0 Scanner counter (large size) Scanner
1 Scanner counter (small size)
2 Scanner counter (total)

Description
When these codes are used, the current value of each scan counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric
value.

* 0 to 99999999
* Default: 0

Counting conditions are as follows.


Small size: The scan counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of small size paper
(designated paper size other than large size paper) is scanned.
Large size: The scan counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of large size paper is
scanned.
* Large size paper setting (08-353)
Total: The sum of large size and small size paper is counted.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the scan count is
calculated.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 47
08-330/332

Display of Number of Transmitted/Received Pages in FAX Function

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
The Fax counters include a transmission and a reception counter. Each counter is intended to accumu-
late Fax transmission/reception counts by paper size (small/large size). These codes are used to dis-
play and check the current values of Fax transmission/reception counters.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Sub code Applied to Function mode
08-330 0 Fax transmission counts (large size) Fax
1 Fax transmission counts (small size)
2 Fax transmission counts (total)
08-332 0 Fax reception counts (large size)
1 Fax reception counts (small size)
2 Fax reception counts (total)

Description
When these codes are used, the current value of the Fax transmission/reception counter is shown up to
an 8 digit numeric value.

* 0 to 99999999
* Default: 0

Counting conditions are as follows.


Small size: The Fax communication counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of small
size paper (designated paper size other than large size paper) is transmitted/
received by Fax.
Large size: The Fax communication counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of large
size paper is transmitted/received by Fax.
* Large size paper setting (08-353)
Total: The sum of large size and small size paper is counted.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the Fax transmis-
sion/reception count is calculated.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 48
08-335

Display of Total Number of Pages

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
The counter is intended to accumulate print counts for copy printing, printer printing, Fax printing, and
list printing by paper size (small/large size). This code is used to display and check total counts by
paper size.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
3
Code Sub code Applied to
08-335 0 Total counts (large size)
1 Total counts (small size)
2 Total counts (total)

Description
When this code is used, the current value of the counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric value. The
digital keys are used to enter the counter value.

0 to 99999999
* Default: 0

Counting conditions are as follows.


Small size: The counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of small size paper
(designated paper size other than large size paper) is printed.
Large size: The counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of large size paper is
printed.
However, the counter is incremented by 2, every time a sheet of large size paper
is printed and transmitted/received.
* Large size paper setting (08-353)
* Large size paper double count setting (08-352)
Total: The sum of large size and small size paper is counted.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check each counter value by paper size when the maintenance is performed or the
print count is calculated.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 49
08-345

Count Setting of Envelope (PM)

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to increment the PM (Preventive Maintenance) related
counters by 2, every time a copy or printout is made on a large size envelope.
When the value set for "Paper size (feeding/widthwise direction) (08-337 to 341)" for an envelope,
exceeds the length set for "Definition setting of large size paper (PM) (08-347)," the envelope is
counted as a large size envelope.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to increment the counters by 2 is specified, every time a copy or
printout is made on a large size envelope.

0: Increment the counter by 1


1: Increment the counter by 2
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the PM related counters to be incremented by 1, every time a copy or printout is
made on a large size envelope.

Caution
A value set for this code affects the PM support related counters (other than feeding).
This code is set to increment the PM support related counters by 2, for the time to perform the PM. If
this setting is reset, the PM will be necessary before the counters reach PM counts.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 50
08-346

Count Setting of Large Size Paper (PM)

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to increment the PM (Preventive Maintenance) related
counters by 2, every time a copy or printout is made on large size paper.
* The paper counted as large size paper is specified in accordance with "Definition setting of large
size paper (PM) (08-347)."

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to increment the counters by 2 is specified, every time a copy or
printout is made on large size paper.
3

0: Increment the counter by 1


1: Increment the counter by 2
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the PM related counters to be incremented by 1, every time a copy or printout is
made on large size paper.

Caution
A value set for this code affects the PM support related counters (other than feeding).
This code is set to increment the PM support related counters by 2, for the time to perform the PM. If
this setting is reset, the PM will be necessary before the counters reach PM counts.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 51
08-347/353

Definition Setting of Large Size Paper (PM / Fee Charging System


Counter)

Purpose
These codes are used to specify whether or not to increment the counters by 2, which are involved in
billing such as the total counter and key copy counter, or the counters, which are involved in the PM
such as the PM support related counters, every time a copy or printout is made on large size paper.
These codes are used to reset the size of paper, which is counted as large size paper.
* Whether or not to increment the counters by 2 is specified in accordance with "Count setting of large
size paper (08-346/352)."

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
08-347 Definition setting of large size paper (PM)
08-353 Definition setting of large size paper (Fee charging system counter)

Description
When these codes are used, the size of paper, which is counted as large size paper, is reset.

08-347: Definition setting of large size paper (PM)


0: A3, LD
1: A3, B4, FOLIO, LD, LG, COMP
* Default: 1

08-353: Definition setting of large size paper (Fee charging system counter)
0: A3, LD
1: A3, B4, FOLIO, LD, LG, COMP, 8K
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use these codes to reset the counting condition of the total counter, according to a change in billing
conditions.

Caution
The values set for these codes affect the following counters and PM support related counters (other
than feeding).
Definition setting of large size paper (PM) (08-347) is set to the default, for the time to perform the
PM. If the setting is reset, the PM will be necessary before the counters reach PM counts.
Printing counter (by paper size) (08-305 to 308)
Printing counter (by large/small size) (08-320 to 323)
Scan counter (by large/small size) (08-327 to 329)
FAX counter (by large/small size) (08-330/332)
Display of total number of pages (08-335)
Key copy counter
Coin controller
Copy Key Card

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 52
08-348/349

Definition Setting of Thick Paper / Transparency Film (PM)

Purpose
These codes are used to specify whether or not to increment the PM (Preventive Maintenance) related
life counters by 2, every time a copy or printout is made on transparency film (in transparency film
mode) or thick paper (in thick paper 1 or 2 mode).

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
08-348 Count setting of thick paper (PM)
3
08-349 Count setting of transparency film (PM)

Description
When these codes are used, whether or not to increment the counters by 2 is specified, every time a
copy or printout is made on transparency film or thick paper.

0: Increment the counter by 1


1: Increment the counter by 2
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use these codes to reset the counting condition of the life counters, when transparency film, thick paper
1 or thick paper 2 is used.

Caution
The values set for these codes affect the PM support related counters (other than feeding).
These codes are set to the default, for the time to perform the PM. If the setting is reset, the PM will
be necessary before the counters reach PM counts.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 53
08-352

Count Setting of Large Size Paper (Fee Charging System Counter)

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to increment the counters by 2, which are involved in billing
such as the total counter and key copy counter, every time a copy or printout is made on large size
paper including a large size envelope.
* The paper counted as large size paper is specified in accordance with "Definition setting of large
size paper (Fee charging system counter) (08-353)."

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to increment the counters by 2 is specified, every time a copy or
printout is made on large size paper.

0: Increment the counter by 1


1: Increment the counter by 2
* Default: JPN: 0, Others: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the counting condition of the total counter, according to a change in billing condi-
tions.

Caution
A value set for this code affects the following counters:
Printing counter (By paper size) (08-305 to 308)
Printing counter (By large/small size) (08-320 to 323)
Scan counter (By large/small size) (08-327 to 329)
FAX counter (By large/small size) (08-330/332)
Display of total number of pages (08-335)
Key copy counter
Coin controller
Copy key card

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 54
08-356 to 358/360/370/372/374/1411

Drawer Counter Display

* Codes 08-360, 370 and 372 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
The drawer counters are intended to accumulate copy counts fed from the drawers. These codes are
used to display and check the current values of the drawer counters.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Applied to 3
08-356 Counter display for the drawer
08-357 Counter display for the PFU drawer
08-358 Counter display for the bypass tray (other than envelope)
08-360 Counter display for the PFP upper drawer
08-370 Counter display for the PFP lower drawer
08-372 Counter display for the ADU
08-374 Counter display for the ADF/RADF
08-1411 Counter display for the bypass tray (envelope)

Description
When these codes are used, the current values of the drawer counters are shown up to an 8-digit
numeric value.

0 to 99999999 (copy counts)


* Default: 0

Counting conditions are as follows.


Drawer counter:The counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of paper is copied or printed,
regardless of the paper size.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check copy counts fed from the drawers, as a guide for replacing the drawer related
PM parts (such as the pick-up roller).

Caution
The drawer counter values are stored on the SRAM board. If the SRAM board is replaced, refer to the
data list in 08 SETTING code, use these codes to enter the current values, and restore the counters to
the state before the replacement of the SRAM board.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 55
08-361/1150/1158/1172/1174/1182/1198/1200/1214/1224/1246/1250/
1268/1298/1300/1312/1314/1316/1320/1322/1328/1330/1332/1336

PM Management Setting

* Codes 08-1312/1314/1320/1322/1328/1330 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to display each copy counts, each driving time and replacement counts regard-
ing the target PM replacement parts.
Remember to clear the codes of the parts replaced after replacing them.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

[08-1150: Drum]
Code Sub code Applied to Default
08-1150 0 Present copy counts 0
1 Recommended copy counts for replacement e-STUDIO163: 72,000
e-STUDIO203: 90,000
e-STUDIO165: 72,000
e-STUDIO205: 90,000
3 Present driving counts 0
4 Recommended driving counts for replace- 180,000
ment
6 Present copy counts for control 0
7 Present driving counts for control 0

Note:
Only code 08-1150 is shown in the above table. Refer to the following pages for other codes and
default values. The descriptions of "Description", "Setting Timing" and "Caution", are the same as
for code 08-1150. Therefore, they are omitted.

Description
Perform the following settings regarding the target PM parts.
Sub code 0: This sub code is used to display the copy counts accumulated up to present.
Sub code 1: This sub code is used to specify the recommended copy counts for replacement.
Sub code 3: This sub code is used to display the driving counts accumulated up to present.
Sub code 4: This sub code is used to specify the recommended driving counts for replacement.
Sub code 6: This sub code is used to display the copy counts for control accumulated up to
present.
Sub code 7: This sub code is used to display the driving counts for control accumulated up to
present.

Sub codes 0, 3, 6, 7:
0: Clears the counter
1 to 99999999 (copy or time counts (1 count = 2 seconds))
* Default: 0

Sub codes 1, 4:
1 to 99999999 (copy or time counts (1 count = 2 seconds))
* Default: Refer to the table.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 56
Setting Timing
Use these codes to display/reset each copy counts, each driving time and replacement counts regard-
ing the target PM replacement parts.

Caution
The values for sub codes 0 and 6, 3 and 7 are the same.
When a value for sub code 0 is updated, the same value is updated for sub code 6. When a value
for sub code 3 is reset, the same value is updated for sub code 7 is updated. Likewise, when a value
for sub code 6 is updated, the same value is updated for sub code 0. When a value for sub code 7 is
reset, the same value is updated for sub code 3.
When "0" is set for either of sub codes 0, 3, 6, and 7, "0" is updated for all sub codes 0, 3, 6, and 7.

[08-1158: Drum cleaning blade]


[08-1172: Drum separation finger] 3
[08-1174: Main charger grid]
[08-1182: Needle electrode]
[08-1200: Developer material]
[08-1214: Transfer charger wire]
[08-1224: Separation charger wire]
[08-1336: Recovery blade]
Code Sub code Applied to Default
08-1158 0 Present copy counts 0
08-1172 1 Recommended copy counts for replacement e-STUDIO163: 72,000
08-1174 e-STUDIO203: 90,000
08-1182 e-STUDIO165: 72,000
08-1200 e-STUDIO205: 90,000
08-1214 3 Present driving counts 0
08-1224
08-1336 4 Recommended driving counts for replacement 180,000
6 Present copy counts for control 0
7 Present driving counts for control 0
* The counter for code 08-1200 is automatically cleared and replacement counts are automatically
counted up after "Automatic adjustment of auto-toner sensor (05-200)" is performed.

[08-1198: Ozone filter]


[08-361: Upper fuser roller bushing]
[08-1246: Fuser roller]
[08-1250: Pressure roller]
[08-1268: Fuser roller separation finger]
Code Sub code Applied to Default
08-361 0 Present copy counts 0
08-1198 1 Recommended copy counts for replacement e-STUDIO163: 72,000
08-1246 e-STUDIO203: 90,000
08-1250 e-STUDIO165: 72,000
08-1268 e-STUDIO205: 90,000
3 Present driving counts 0
4 Recommended driving counts for replacement 180,000
6 Present copy counts for control 0
7 Present driving counts for control 0

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 57
[08-1298: Feed roller (Drawer)]
[08-1300: Feed roller (PFU drawer)]
[08-1312: Separation roller (PFP upper drawer)]
[08-1314: Separation roller (PFP lower drawer)]
[08-1316: Separation roller (bypass tray)]
[08-1320: Feed roller (PFP upper drawer)]
[08-1322: Feed roller (PFP lower drawer)]
[08-1328: Pickup roller (PFP upper drawer)]
[08-1330: Pickup roller (PFP lower drawer)]
[08-1332: Pickup roller (bypass tray)]
Code Sub code Applied to Default
08-1298 0 Present copy counts 0
08-1300 1 Recommended copy counts for replacement 80,000
08-1312
08-1314
08-1316
08-1320
08-1322
08-1328
08-1330
08-1332

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 58
08-381

External Counter Function

Purpose
This code is used to count the number of copies in each operation mode of the equipment, when the
external counter is used. (The counter set for "Externally installed copy counter / Controller device (08-
202)" is used as the external counter.)
Only the number of copies is counted by default when the copy function is used. However, when the
setting is changed, the numbers of copies are counted when the Fax and printer functions are used.

Description
When this code is used, the counting target operation mode is reset.
3

0: Not selected (Does not count)


1: Copier
2: Fax
3: Copier/Fax
4: Printer
5: Copier/Printer
6: Printer/Fax
7: Copier/Printer/Fax
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the counting target operation mode of the external
counter.

Caution
When this code is used to count the number of copies at the external counter, unless the external
counter is connected, the operation mode specified cannot be used.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 59
08-388/389

Copying Total Counter

Purpose
The total counter shows important values to operate this equipment (to calculate billing amounts). In
case of any trouble, counter values are written into memory on the MAIN board and SRAM board in
parallel, to avoid losing these values. These codes are used to alternatively copy counter values on the
boards.

Description
When these codes are used, counter values are copied in the direction specified by codes entered.

08-388:This code is used to copy counter values on the MAIN board onto the SRAM board.
08-389:This code is used to copy counter values on the SRAM board onto the MAIN board.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to copy counter values onto the board where the counter values have been replaced,
after replacing the MAIN board or SRAM board.

Caution
Remember to record the current counter values before copying counter values.
Never confuse the copying direction to copy counter values on the replaced board.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 60
08-400

Fuser Unit Error Status Counter

Purpose
When a fuser unit related error (error code C41, C43, C44 or C45) occurs, the set value of the fuser sta-
tus counter varies, depending on type of error.
Displaying and checking the set value of the fuser status counter can analyze a cause for the error. If
any of "2 to 9" is set at the fuser status counter, the fuser unit will not be operated for safety reasons.
After the fuser unit related error is resolved, if "0" is set, the fuser unit will be operated as usual. If any of
"10 to 19" is set at the fuser status counter, the fuser unit will be operated as usual, even if "0" is not set
after the fuser unit related error is resolved.
3
C41: Thermistor or heater abnormality at power-ON
C43: Thermistor abnormality after abnormality judgment
C44: Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment
C45: Thermistor abnormality during printing
C46 to C49: Reserved

Description
When this code is used, the current set value of the fuser status counter is displayed. Only "0" can be
manually entered, in order to restore the fuser unit to its normal operation, after the fuser unit related
error is resolved.
For further reason why the counter value differs despite the same error code, refer to 5.1.7 or 5.1.8
[Fuser unit related service call] in the Service Handbook.

0: No error 10: C47 (Reserved)


1: C41 (Once) 11: C47 (Reserved)
2: C41 (Consecutively occurs) 12: C48 (Reserved)
3: C46 (Reserved) 13: C49 (Reserved)
4: C43 14: C47 (Reserved)
5: C44 15: C48 (Reserved)
6: C45 16: C49 (Reserved)
7: C44 17: C47 (Reserved)
8: C45 18: C48 (Reserved)
9: C44 19: C49 (Reserved)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to resolve the fuser unit related error (error code C41, C43, C44 or C45). Resolve the
error, and set "0" (or reset the counter), in order to restore the fuser unit to its normal operation.

Caution
Remember to resolve the fuser unit related error, and then reset to "0."

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 61
08-404/405

Temperature Drop Setting in Ready State

Purpose
These codes are used to set the drop temperature to control the temperature drop of the fuser unit in
the ready state. When the temperature drops, the temperature of the fuser unit is reduced, allowing
each thermistor to detect a difference in the specified temperature. When these codes are used to reset
the drop temperature of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Sub code Applied to
08-404 0 Center thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop
1 Center thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop
2 Center thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop
3 Center thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop
08-405 0 Side thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop
1 Side thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop
2 Side thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop
3 Side thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop

Description
When these codes are used, the drop temperature in the ready state is reset.
* The set value is valid only if 20 is set for Temperature drop control setting in ready state (08-886).

Set value x -5 C = Drop temperature in the ready state

0: No temperature drop in the ready state


1 to 10: Temperature drop in the ready state (-5 to -50 C)
* Default: 08-404: 1, 08-405: 3

* Set value in the case of inconsistent fusing:


08-404-0 to 3: 1, 08-405-0 to 3: 1

Setting Timing
Use these codes, if inconsistent fusing occurs when printing is performed after an extended period of
time in the ready state.

Caution
If inconsistent fusing occurs, reset the set value for code 08-886 and then adjust this code.
If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully
perform the setting.
Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set
value.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 62
08-407/411

Fuser Roller Temperature in Ready State

Purpose
These codes are used to set the temperature of the fuser roller in the ready state. (The temperature is
detected by the center thermistor and the side thermistor of the fuser unit. The temperature can be indi-
vidually specified.)
As the lower temperature is set, more power consumption is reduced in the ready state. If the tempera-
ture of the fuser roller is too low, stable and consistent fusing may not be provided at the start of print-
ing.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications: 3
Code Applied to
08-407 Temperature of the fuser roller in ready state (Side thermistor)
08-411 Temperature of the fuser roller in ready state (Center thermistor)

Description
When these codes are used, the temperature of the fuser roller in the ready state is reset.

0: 140 C 4: 160 C 8: 180 C 12: 200 C


1: 145 C 5: 165 C 9: 185 C
2: 150 C 6: 170 C 10: 190 C
3: 155 C 7: 175 C 11: 195 C
* Default: 6

Setting Timing
Use these codes to set the lower temperature, in order to reduce power consumption. Note that incon-
sistent fusing may occur if the lower temperature is set.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 63
08-409/448

Fuser Roller Temperature in Energy Saver Mode

Purpose
These codes are used to set the temperature of the fuser roller when the equipment switches to energy
saver mode. The temperature is detected by the center thermistor and the side thermistor of the fuser
unit. The temperatures can be individually specified.

As the lower temperature is set, more power consumption is reduced in energy saver mode, but an
extended period of time is required to start printing. On the contrary, as the higher temperature is set,
more power consumption is necessary, but a less period of time is required to start printing.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
08-409 Temperature of the fuser roller in energy saver mode (Side thermistor)
08-448 Temperature of the fuser roller in energy saver mode (Center thermistor)

Description
When these codes are used, the temperature of the fuser roller in energy saver mode is reset.

0: OFF 4: 70 C 8: 110 C 12: 150 C


1: 40 C 5: 80 C 9: 120 C 13: 160 C
2: 50 C 6: 90 C 10: 130 C
3: 60 C 7: 100 C 11: 140 C
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use these codes to set the higher temperature, if an extended period of time is required to start printing
by default.
In this case, notify users that more power consumption is necessary.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 64
08-410/413/437/438/450 to 453/520/521

Fuser Roller Temperature during Printing (by Paper Type)

Purpose
These codes are used to set the temperature of the fuser roller during the print operation, to provide
stable and consistent fusing. A temperature is detected by the center thermistor and the side thermistor
of the fuser unit. The temperatures can be individually specified.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
08-410 Plain paper mode (Center thermistor)
3
08-413 Thick paper 1 mode (Center thermistor)
08-437 Thick paper 2 mode (Center thermistor)
08-438 Transparency film mode (Center thermistor)
08-450 Plain paper mode (Side thermistor)
08-451 Thick paper 1 mode (Side thermistor)
08-452 Thick paper 2 mode (Side thermistor)
08-453 Transparency film mode (Side thermistor)
08-520 Envelope mode (Center thermistor)
08-521 Envelope mode (Side thermistor)

Description
When these codes are used, the temperature of the fuser roller is reset by paper type and temperature
control thermistor.

0: 140 C 5: 165 C 10: 190 C


1: 145 C 6: 170 C 11: 195 C
2: 150 C 7: 175 C 12: 200 C
3: 155 C 8: 180 C 13: 205 C
160 C 9: 185 C 14: 210 C
* Default:
08-410/413: 6, 08-437: 9, 08-438: 6, 08-450/451: 6, 08-452: 9, 08-453: 6,
08-520/521: 9

Setting Timing
In the case of inconsistent fusing, use these codes to set a larger value if the fusing temperature seems
low, and set a smaller value if the fusing temperature seems high.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.
Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set
value.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 65
08-414

Toner Density Correction Switching

Purpose
The auto-toner sensor is used to detect the toner density, and toner-supply operation is performed to
maintain a constant toner density. When this code is used, the threshold value to supply toner and the
toner density in the developer material vary.
A problem such as insufficient image density is more likely to occur when the developer material
reaches almost the end of its life, thus, this correction gradually increases the correction amount,
depending on the life of the developer material.

Description
The relationship of the set value and the toner density is as follows:

Life: approx.30,000 pages Life: approx.60,000 pages Life: approx.90,000 pages


0: Does not correct 0: Does not correct 0: Does not correct
1: -1 bit (approx. -0.2 wt%) 1: Does not correct 1: Does not correct
2: +1 bit (approx. +0.2 wt%) 2: +1 bit (approx. +0.2 wt%) 2: +1 bit (approx. +0.2 wt%)
3: +1 bit (approx. +0.2 wt%) 3: +2 bit (approx. +0.5wt%) 3: +2 bit (approx. -0.5 wt%)
4: -1 bit (approx. -0.2 wt%) 4: -1 bit (approx. -0.2 wt%) 4: -1 bit (approx. -0.2 wt%)
5: -2 bit (approx. -0.4 wt%) 5: -1 bit (approx. -0.2 wt%) 5: -2 bit (approx. -0.4 wt%)
6: -2 bit (approx. -0.4 wt%) 6: -2 bit (approx. -0.4 wt%) 6: -4 bit (approx. -0.8 wt%)
7: -3 bit (approx. -0.6wt%) 7: -4 bit (approx. -0.8 wt%) 7: -5 bit (approx. - 1.0 wt%)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code, if the printing density is extremely high or low.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.
If the toner density in the developer material is too low, the printing density becomes low. The carrier
adheres to the drum and a scratch may occur on the drum.
If the toner density in the developer material is too high, a problem such as toner scattering may
occur. In addition, toner consumption is increased.
Note that the image is not immediately affected even if the set value is reset. (The toner density in
the developer material will not become higher or lower until a certain amount of print operation is
performed.)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 66
08-424/425

Temperature Drop Switching Time Setting in Ready State

Purpose
These codes are used to set the drop temperature timing to control the temperature drop of the fuser
unit in the ready state. When the temperature drops, the temperature of the fuser unit is reduced, every
time the specified temperature passes. In this case, the temperature of the fuser unit is reduced, allow-
ing each thermistor to detect a difference in the temperature set for 08-404/405. When these codes are
used to reset the drop temperature timing of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
3
Code Sub code Applied to
08-424 0 Switching time during the 1st drop (Center thermistor)
1 Switching time during the 2nd drop (Center thermistor)
2 Switching time during the 3rd drop (Center thermistor)
3 Switching time during the 4th drop (Center thermistor)
08-425 0 Switching time during the 1st drop (Side thermistor)
1 Switching time during the 2nd drop (Side thermistor)
2 Switching time during the 3rd drop (Side thermistor)
3 Switching time during the 4th drop (Side thermistor)

Description
When these codes are used, the switching time to control the temperature drop in the ready state is
reset.
* The set value is valid only if 20 is set for Temperature drop control setting in ready state (08-886).

Set value x 1 minute = Switching time to control the temperature drop in the ready state
2 to 60: Temperature drop in the ready state (2 to 60 minutes later)
* Default: 5 (15 minutes later)

Setting Timing
Use these codes, if inconsistent fusing occurs when printing is performed after an extended period of
time in the ready state.

Caution
If inconsistent fusing occurs, reset the set value for code 08-886 and then adjust this code.
If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully
perform the setting.
Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set
value.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 67
08-433/800/801/802/804/896

Temperature Control Lower Limit

Purpose
These codes are used to set the lower limit of the drop temperature to control the temperature drop of
the fuser unit. When these codes are used to reset the lower limit of the drop temperature of the fuser
unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Sub code Applied to
08-433 0 Plain paper mode at room temperature (Center thermistor)
1 Plain paper mode at room temperature (Side thermistor)
08-800 0 Transparency film mode (Center thermistor)
1 Transparency film mode (Side thermistor)
08-801 0 Thick paper 1 mode (Center thermistor)
1 Thick paper 1 mode (Side thermistor)
08-802 0 Thick paper 2 mode (Center thermistor)
1 Thick paper 2 mode (Side thermistor)
08-804 0 Envelope mode (Center thermistor)
1 Envelope mode (Side thermistor)
08-896 0 Plain paper mode at low temperature (Center thermistor)
1 Plain paper mode at low temperature (Side thermistor)

Description
When these codes are used, the lower limit of the drop temperature to control the temperature drop is
reset.

0: 130 C 5: 155 C 10: 180 C


1: 135 C 6: 160 C 11: 185 C
2: 140 C 7: 165 C 12: 120 C
3: 145 C 8: 170 C
4: 150 C 9: 175 C
* Default:
08-433-0: 5, 08-433-1: 3, 08-800-0: 7, 08-800-1: 5, 08-801-0: 7, 08-801-1:5
08-802-0/1: 11, 08-804-0/1: 11, 08-896-0: 5, 08-896-1: 3

Setting Timing
Use these codes, if inconsistent fusing occurs when continuous printing is performed in large quanti-
ties.

Caution
If inconsistent fusing occurs, reset the set value for code 08-535 and then adjust this code.
Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set
value.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 68
08-439 to 441/523/526

Pre-Running Time for First Printing (by Paper Type)

Purpose
These codes are used to set a period of time required to print the first page (a pre-running time) by
paper type, in order to provide stable and consistent fusing when the first page is printed.
It is necessary to set a pre-running time and increase the temperature of the fuser roller, to provide sta-
ble and consistent fusing when the first page is printed.
An extended period of time is set by default to give priority to the image quality. However, a shorter
period of time can be set for users who do not desire to set an extended period of time required to print
the first page.
3
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
08-439 Thick paper 2 mode
08-440 Plain paper mode
08-441 Thick paper 1 mode
08-523 Envelope mode
08-526 Transparency film mode

Description
When these codes are used, a pre-running time required to print the first page is reset by paper type.

0: Invalid 4: 4 sec. 8: 8 sec. 12: 14 sec.


1: 1 sec. 5: 5 sec. 9: 9 sec. 13: 16 sec.
2: 2 sec. 6: 6 sec. 10: 10 sec. 14: 18 sec.
3: 3 sec. 7: 7 sec. 11: 12 sec. 15: 20 sec.
* Default: 08-439: 10, 08-440: 0, 08-441: 10, 08-523: 10, 08-526: 0

Setting Timing
Use these codes to set a smaller value (shorter time) in order to reduce a pre-running time required to
print the first page.
If the smaller value is set (shorter time), inconsistent fusing is more likely to occur.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 69
08-455

Toner Supply Amount Correction

Purpose
When the toner motor is rotated, toner is supplied to the developer. This code is used to correct the
toner motor rotation period when toner is supplied, and the amount of toner supplied at one time.

Description
When this code is used, the toner motor rotation period is reset when toner is supplied.

0: 100%
1: 75%
2: 50%
3: 30%
4: 200%
5: 150%
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to reduce the toner motor rotation period and the amount of toner supplied at a time,
when toner is supplied.
Use this code to increase the toner motor rotation period and the amount of toner supplied at a time.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 70
08-462

Setting for Switchback Operation to Copy Mixed-Sized Original on RADF


(A/B Format)

* This code is valid only when the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) is installed.

Purpose
When an original with A4-R or FOLIO width (both 210 mm in width) is copied in mixed-sized original
mode, either A4-R or FOLIO cannot be identified by their original widths, because they are the same.
Therefore, detect their original lengths, in order to identify A4-R and FOLIO.
The table below shows the combination of the switchback (transporting without scanning in reverse) 3
setting status and the paper selection mode (APS/AMS) when an original with A4-R/FOLIO width is
copied. As this table explains, since the "transporting without scanning in reverse" function does not
apply in the default setting ("Invalid"), FOLIO is detected as A4-R when the AMS (Automatic Magnifica-
tion Selection) is selected, and paper is fed from the A4-sized drawer. In other combinations, an A4-R/
FOLIO-sized original is detected properly regardless of the selection status of the "transporting without
scanning in reverse" function.
In other words, it is necessary to enable the transporting without scanning in reverse function, in order
to detect a FOLIO-sized original properly, when the AMS is selected.

[Paper size: A4-R/FOLIO]


Transporting without scanning
Paper selection "0" (Invalid) "1" (Valid)
in reverse / size detection
APS Transporting without scanning in Not performed Not performed
(Automatic Paper reverse
Selection) Size selection A4-R --> A4-R A4-R --> A4-R
FOLIO --> FOLIO FOLIO --> FOLIO
AMS Transporting without scanning in Not performed Not performed
(Automatic Magnifica- reverse
tion Selection) Size selection A4-R --> A4-R A4-R --> A4-R
FOLIO --> A4-R FOLIO --> FOLIO

* For the equipment destined for regions, where the LT-format original is applied, whenever LT-R/LG
width is detected, an original is transported without scanning in reverse when the AMS is selected,
regardless of the value set for this code.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to transport A4-R/FOLIO-sized originals without scanning in
reverse is reset, when these mixed originals are placed on the ADF/RADF when the AMS is selected.

0: Invalid (Does not transport in reverse without scanning)


1: Valid (When the AMS is selected, the original length is detected by transporting without scanning
in reverse, and FOLIO is identified properly)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to distinguish A4-R and FOLIO in mixed-sized original mode
when the AMS is selected.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 71
Caution
This code is valid only for the equipment destined for regions, where the A/B-format original is
applied.
If "1" (Valid) is set, and, even when only A4-R-size originals are placed in mixed-sized original mode
when the AMS is selected, these originals are transported in reverse without scanning. As a result,
the original scanning speed is reduced.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 72
08-463

Light Control Status

Purpose
After performing Forced performing of peak detection (05-310) is performed, this code is used to dis-
play the end status and check the status of the exposure light source.

Description
When this code is used, the result on forced performing of peak detection is displayed.

0: Normal end
1: G-LED white level abnormality
3
2: G-LED peak detection abnormality
3: R-LED adjustment impossible
4: B-LED adjustment impossible
5: YG-LED adjustment impossible
6: White level abnormality
7: Black level abnormality
* Normal operation: 0, in the case of an error: 1 to 7

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the details of the error, if an error occurs when forced performing of peak detec-
tion is executed

Caution
When an error occurs (0 to 7 is set), a service call appears. Therefore, replace the CIS unit.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 73
08-476/536/537/539

Temperature Drop Setting during Printing

Purpose
These codes are used to set the drop temperature to control the temperature drop of the fuser unit
when the printer function is used to print. When the temperature drops, the temperature of the fuser unit
is reduced, allowing each thermistor to detect a difference in the specified temperature. When these
codes are used to reset the drop temperature of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Sub code Applied to
08-476 0 Thick paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop
1 Thick paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop
2 Thick paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop
3 Thick paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop
08-536 0 Plain paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop
1 Plain paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop
2 Plain paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop
3 Plain paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop
08-537 0 Plain paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop
1 Plain paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop
2 Plain paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop
3 Plain paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop
08-539 0 Thick paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop
1 Thick paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop
2 Thick paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop
3 Thick paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop

Description
When these codes are used, the drop temperature is reset when the printer function is used to print.
* The set value is valid only if 20 is set for Temperature drop control setting during printing (08-
535).

Set value x -5 C = Drop temperature during the print operation

0: No temperature drop during the print operation


1 to 10: Temperature drop during the print operation (-5 to 50 C)

* Default value:
08-476-0: 1, 08-476-1: 1, 08-476-2: 1, 08-476-3: 1
08-536-0: 1, 08-536-1: 2, 08-536-2: 3, 08-536-3: 3
08-537-0: 1, 08-537-1: 2, 08-537-2: 3, 08-537-3: 5
08-539-0: 1, 08-539-1: 2, 08-539-2: 3, 08-539-3: 3

* Set value in the case of inconsistent fusing:


08-476-0: 0, 08-476-1: 0, 08-476-2: 1, 08-476-3: 1
08-536-0: 0, 08-536-1: 0, 08-536-2: 1, 08-536-3: 1
08-537-0: 0, 08-537-1: 0, 08-537-2: 0, 08-537-3: 1
08-539-0: 0, 08-539-1: 0, 08-539-2: 1, 08-539-3: 1

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 74
Setting Timing
Use these codes, if inconsistent fusing occurs when the printer function is used and continuous printing
is performed in large quantities of plain paper and thick paper.

Caution
If inconsistent fusing occurs, reset the set value for code 08-535 and then adjust this code.
If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully
perform the setting.
Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set
value.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 75
08-480

Default Setting of Paper Source

Purpose
This code is used to specify the paper source option, which is selected by priority, when the copy and
Fax reception functions are used to print. This set value is applied as the paper source, which is
selected by default when the [COPY] or [APS/AMS] button is pressed, and as the paper source, which
is used by priority when the copy and Fax reception functions are used to print and the automatic paper
source selection function is used to feed.
* APS (Automatic Paper Selection): It is intended to start printing while automatically detecting the
size of an original and selecting a drawer where the detected size of paper is loaded.

Description
When this code is used, the paper source option by priority is reset.

0: Paper source where A4 or LT-size paper is loaded


1: Drawer
2: PFU drawer
3: PFP upper drawer
4: PFP lower drawer
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to specify the paper source option, which is used by priority.
* For instance, if A4-size bond paper and recycled paper are loaded in the separate drawers, use this
code to select a drawer where recycled paper is loaded by priority.

Caution
The set value is applied only when the copy and Fax reception functions are used to print.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 76
08-481

Automatic Paper Source Selection

Purpose
The automatic paper source change function is intended to switch to another paper source, where the
same sized paper is loaded, if the selected paper source has run out of paper during the copy opera-
tion. This code is used to specify whether or not to enable the automatic paper source change function.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable the automatic paper source change function is reset
during the copy operation.
3
0: Enables
1: Disables
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to disable the automatic paper source change function.

Caution
The set value is applied only when the copy function is used.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 77
08-482

Feeding Retry

Purpose
It is hard to feed thick paper or transparency film, compared to plain paper. The equipment automati-
cally retries to feed such hard-to-feed paper, in order to thoroughly feed it after it fails to feed. This code
is used to specify whether or not to enable paper feed retry.
* When this code is used to enable paper feed retry, up to five retries are performed.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable paper feed retry is reset.

0: Enables
1: Disables
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to specify whether or not to enable paper feed retry.

Caution
The number of retries cannot be reset. (Five retries are fixed.)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 78
08-483

Pre-Running Rotation of Polygonal Motor

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to switch the polygonal motor from its standby rotation (low
speed rotation) to its normal rotation (high speed rotation during the scan operation), when an original is
placed on the ADF/RADF or the platen cover is opened.
* If the polygonal motor switches to its normal rotation when the original is placed on the ADF/RADF
or the platen cover is opened, but the equipment does not start the operation to scan originals within
a certain period of time, the polygonal motor goes back to its standby rotation. The period of time
until it goes back to its standby rotation is set in "Timing of auto-cleaning of polygonal motor pre-run-
ning rotation (08-486)." 3

Description
When this code is used, the switching condition of the polygonal motor from its standby rotation to its
normal rotation is reset.

0: Valid (when the original is placed on the RADF or the platen cover is opened)
1: Invalid
2: Valid (only when the original is placed on the ADF/RADF)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to switch the polygonal motor rotation state between its standby rotation and its normal
rotation, if the original is placed on the ADF/RADF or the platen cover is opened.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 79
08-486

Timing of Auto-Clearing of Polygonal Motor Pre-Running Rotation

Purpose
When the equipment does not perform the operation to scan originals for a certain period of time after
the polygonal motor starts pre-running, the polygonal motor switches back from its normal rotation (high
speed rotation during the scan operation) to its standby rotation (low speed rotation). This code is used
to specify the period of time until it goes back to its standby rotation.
* Polygonal motor pre-running is the function to switch the polygonal motor rotation from its standby
rotation to its normal rotation when an original is placed on the ADF/RADF or the platen cover is
opened. This code is valid if "0" (default) or "2" is set for "Pre-running rotation of polygonal motor
(08-483)."

Description
When this code is used, the period of time until the polygonal motor switches from its normal rotation to
its standby rotation is reset.

0: 15 sec
1: 30 sec
2: 45 sec
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the period of time required to switch the polygonal motor from its normal rotation
to its standby rotation when the equipment does not perform any operation for a certain period of time.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 80
08-502

Error Diffusion and Dither Setting at Photo Mode

Purpose
This code is used to switch the image processing method, with "Photo" selected from among the origi-
nal mode options, during the copy operation.
Both the error diffusion and dither methods are intended to generate grayscale images using white and
black pixels. But they have different principles.
The dither method determines whether the dot is black or white on a dot-by-dot basis, in accordance
with a particular rule, in response to a gradation of image pixels scanned in Photo mode, and repre-
sents grayscale images based on the ratio of black to white dots. On the other hand, the error diffusion
method performs processing, depending on the target and surrounding pixels instead of on a dot-by-dot 3
basis. It has an advantage of correcting irregularities of the target pixels by checking the surrounding
ones.
The dither method is used by default.

Description
When this code is used, the image processing method is reset in Photo mode during the copy opera-
tion.

0: Error diffusion
1: Dither
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to switch the image processing method in Photo mode during the copy operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 81
08-510

Automatic FAX Transmission

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Fax Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to automatically start scanning and transmit (automatically)
an original placed on the equipment, when one-touch keys are used or the [SPEED DIAL] button is
pressed during the fax transmission.
In addition, this code is used to start fax transmission when one-touch keys are used or the [SPEED
DIAL] button is pressed, and also the [START] button is pressed, in order to prevent improper transmis-
sion by users and protect security.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to use the automatic fax transmission function is reset.

0: Automatic transmission enabled


(Use one-touch keys or press or the [SPEED DIAL] button to transmit a fax.)
1: Automatic transmission disabled
(Use one-touch keys or press the [SPEED DIAL] button, and also press the [START] button to
transmit a fax.)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset automatic fax transmission.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 82
08-515/516

Temperature Setting during Warming-up

Purpose
These codes are used to set the temperature of the fuser roller during warming-up. A temperature is
detected by the center thermistor and the side thermistor of the fuser unit. The temperatures can be
individually specified.
As the lower temperature is set, more power consumption is reduced during warming-up. If the temper-
ature of the fuser roller is too low, stable and consistent fusing may not be provided at the start of print-
ing.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications: 3
Code Applied to
08-515 Temperature setting during warming-up (Center thermistor)
08-516 Temperature setting during warming-up (Side thermistor)

Description
When these codes are used, the temperature of the fuser roller during warming-up is reset.

0: 140 C 5: 165 C 10: 190 C


1: 145 C 6: 170 C 11: 195 C
2: 150 C 7: 175 C 12: 200 C
3: 155 C 8: 180 C 13: 205 C
4: 160 C 9: 185 C 14: 210 C
* Default: 9

Setting Timing
In the case of inconsistent fusing, use these codes to set a larger value if the fusing temperature seems
low, and set a smaller value if the fusing temperature seems high.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.
Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set
value.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 83
08-525/527/540/541

Temperature Drop Switching Time Setting during Printing

Purpose
These codes are used to set the drop temperature timing to control the temperature drop of the fuser
unit when the printer function is used to print. When the temperature drops, the temperature of the fuser
unit is reduced, every time the specified temperature passes. In this case, the temperature of the fuser
unit is reduced, allowing each thermistor to detect a difference in the temperature set for 08-476/536/
537/539. When these codes are used to reset the drop temperature timing of the fuser unit, inconsistent
fusing is avoided.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Sub code Applied to
08-525 0 Plain paper mode, switching time during the 1st drop (Center thermistor)
1 Plain paper mode, switching time during the 2nd drop (Center thermistor)
2 Plain paper mode, switching time during the 3rd drop (Center thermistor)
3 Plain paper mode, switching time during the 4th drop (Center thermistor)
08-527 0 Plain paper mode, switching time during the 1st drop (Side thermistor)
1 Plain paper mode, switching time during the 2nd drop (Side thermistor)
2 Plain paper mode, switching time during the 3rd drop (Side thermistor)
3 Plain paper mode, switching time during the 4th drop (Side thermistor)
08-540 0 Thick paper mode, switching time during the 1st drop (Center thermistor)
1 Thick paper mode, switching time during the 2nd drop (Center thermistor)
2 Thick paper mode, switching time during the 3rd drop (Center thermistor)
3 Thick paper mode, switching time during the 4th drop (Center thermistor)
08-541 0 Thick paper mode, switching time during the 1st drop (Side thermistor)
1 Thick paper mode, switching time during the 2nd drop (Side thermistor)
2 Thick paper mode, switching time during the 3rd drop (Side thermistor)
3 Thick paper mode, switching time during the 4th drop (Side thermistor)

Description
When these codes are used, the switching time to control the temperature drop is reset when the
printer function is used to print.
* The set value is valid only if 20 is set for Temperature drop control setting during printing (08-
535).

Set value x 5 seconds = Switching time to control the temperature drop during the print operation

0: No temperature drop during the print operation


1 to 200: Temperature drop during the print operation (5 to 1,000 seconds later)
* Default:
08-525-0: 20, 08-525-1: 38, 08-525-2: 75, 08-525-3: 75
08-527-0: 20, 08-527-1: 30, 08-527-2: 48, 08-527-3: 75
08-540-0: 20, 08-540-1: 48, 08-540-2: 100, 08-540-3: 100
08-541-0: 20, 08-541-1: 48, 08-541-2: 100, 08-541-3: 100

Setting Timing
Use these codes, if inconsistent fusing occurs when the printer function is used and continuous printing
is performed in large quantities of plain paper and thick paper.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 84
Caution
If inconsistent fusing occurs, reset the set value for code 08-535 and then adjust this code.
If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully
perform the setting.
Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set
value.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 85
08-535

Temperature Drop Control Setting during Printing (Temperature/Time)

Purpose
This code used to set the pattern to control the temperature drop when the printer function is used to
print. In the control pattern, the drop temperature and drop timing to control the temperature drop are
set, and a control pattern option is selected by paper type (plain paper, thick paper). When this code is
used to reset the pattern to control the temperature drop of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Sub code Applied to
08-535 0 Plain paper mode
1 Thick paper mode
* Thick paper 1 and 2, transparency film and envelope are included in thick paper mode.

Description
When this code is used, the pattern to control the temperature drop (drop temperature, drop timing) is
reset when the printer function is used to print.

0: No temperature drop control


1 to 19: Patterns 1 to 19
20: Temperature and timing selected optionally
* Default: 08-535-0: 2, 08-535-1: 12

* Set value in the case of inconsistent fusing: 08-535-0: 7, 08-535-1: 17

* Patterns 1, 3 to 6, 8 to 11, 13 to 19: No need to use

Setting Timing
Set 7 for code 07-535-0, if inconsistent fusing occurs when continuous printing is performed in
large quantities of plain paper.
Set 17 for code 07-535-1, if inconsistent fusing occurs when continuous printing is performed in
large quantities of thick paper.
Set 20 in order to set the drop temperature and drop timing to control the temperature drop individ-
ually. Then, the set values for the following codes will be valid:

Temperature drop setting during printing (08-476/536/537/539)


Temperature drop switching time setting during printing (08-525/527/540/541)

Caution
If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully
perform the setting.
Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set
value.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 86
08-538

Default Setting in Density Adjustment Mode (Copy Function)

Purpose
This code used to specify the density adjustment value, which is displayed as the default on the control
panel and used by priority during the copy operation.

Description
When this code is used, the density adjustment mode, which is used by priority, is reset.

0: Auto density adjustment


1: Manual density adjustment: Low density 3 (Light)
3
2: Manual density adjustment: Low density 2
3: Manual density adjustment: Low density 1
4: Manual density adjustment 0 (Center)
5: Manual density adjustment: High density 1
6: Manual density adjustment: High density 2
7: Manual density adjustment: High density 3 (Dark)
* Default: 0

* On the e-STUDIO165/e-STUDIO205, the default in density adjustment mode is set according to the
following operation:
[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [COPY SETUP] --> [LIGHT/DARK]

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to switch the density adjustment mode, which is used by priority.

Caution
The set value is applied, if the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed when the equipment starts up
and during the copy operation.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 87
08-550

Default Setting of Original Mode (Copy Function)

Purpose
This code is used to specify the original mode, which is displayed as the default on the control panel
and used by priority during the copy operation.

Description
This code is used to specify the original mode, which is displayed as the default on the control panel
and used by priority during the copy operation.

When this code is used, the original mode, which is used by priority, is reset.
0: Text/photo
1: Photo
2: Text
* Default: 0

* On the e-STUDIO165/e-STUDIO205, the default in original mode is set according to the following
operation:
[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [COPY SETUP] --> [IMAGE MODE]

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the original mode, which is used by priority.

Caution
The set value is applied, if the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed when the equipment starts up
and during the copy operation.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 88
08-603

Setting for Automatic Duplexing Mode (Copy Function)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) is installed.

Purpose
This code is to specify the copy mode ("Selection of original single-sided/two sided feeding" and
"Selection of simplex/duplex copying"), which is displayed as the default on the control panel and used
by priority, when an original is placed on the RADF.
3
Description
When this code is used, the copy mode, which is used by priority, is reset.

0: Single-sided feeding to simplex copying (one-sided originals --> one-sided copies)


1: Single-sided feeding to duplex copying (one-sided originals --> two-sided copies)
2: Double-sided feeding to duplex copying (two-sided originals --> two-sided copies)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the copy mode, which is used by priority.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 89
08-604

APS/AMS Default Setting (Copy Function)

Purpose
This code is used to specify which function is displayed as the default on the control panel and used by
priority, "APS (Automatic Paper Selection)" or "AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection)" during the
copy operation.
* APS: It is intended to start printing while automatically detecting the size of an original and selecting
a drawer where the detected size of paper is loaded.
* AMS: It is intended to start printing while selecting a drawer where desired paper is loaded and auto-
matically computing a reproduction ratio to fit into the size of paper.

Description
When this code is used, the function, which is used by priority, is reset.

0: APS (Automatic Paper Selection)


1: AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection)
2: Not selected
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the function, which is used by priority.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 90
08-611

Book Type Original Priority (Copy Function)

Purpose
This code is used to specify the default which book-type original is selected as a reference, where odd-
numbered pages are laid out on the right-hand side, with characters written horizontally, or where odd
numbered pages are laid out on the left-hand side, with characters written vertically, in order to copy a
book-type original in duplexing mode.

Description
When this code is used, the reference book-type original is reset.
3
0: Book-type original, where odd-numbered pages are laid out on the right-hand side
(Copying starts from a left-hand page to a right-hand page.)
1: Book-type original, where odd-numbered pages are laid out on the left-hand side
(Copying is performed from a right-hand page to a left-hand page.)
* Default: 0

<Book-type original, where odd-numbered pages are laid out on the right-hand side>

Book-type original, where 1st sheet 2nd sheet 3rd sheet


odd-numbered pages are laid
out on the right-hand side

<Book-type original, where odd-numbered pages are laid out on the left-hand side>

Book-type original, where 1st sheet 2nd sheet 3rd sheet


odd-numbered pages are laid
out on the left-hand side

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the reference book-type original.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 91
08-615

Size Information of Main Memory and Page Memory

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to display the sizes of main memory and page memory. It is used to check that the
equipment recognizes each memory properly.

Description
When this code is used, the sizes of main memory and page memory are displayed on the screen.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the sizes of main memory and page memory.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 92
08-617

Print Setting without Department Code (Printer Function)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to accept printing until the department code is registered,
when the printer function is used.
Printing without registering the department code is performed by default. However, the department
code is required once the department management code is registered.
3
Description
When this code is used, whether or not to accept printing without registering the department code is
reset when the printer function is used.

0: Prints forcibly (Accepts printing without entering the department code.)


1: Does not print (Does not accept printing without entering the department code.)
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to enable printing without entering the department code, when
the printer function is used.

Caution
The set value is valid only when the department management function is set to "Valid."

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 93
08-618

Default Setting of RADF Original Size (Copy Function)

* This code is valid only when the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) is installed.

Purpose
Mixed original size mode is intended to place originals in different sizes on the RADF, scan and copy
them at once. The mixed original size mode is available when the [MIXED SIZE] button is pressed on
the control panel. This code is used to specify whether or not to use the mixed original size mode by pri-
ority while it is selected by default.

Description
hen this code is used, whether or not to use the mixed original size mode by priority is reset.

0: Same size originals (Without [MIXED SIZE] selected)


1: Mixed size originals (With only [MIXED SIZE] selected)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to select the mixed original size mode by default.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 94
08-631

Custom Mode Setting

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
When the selecting button B is pressed on the main screen during the copy operation, the copy func-
tion registered as a custom function is selected. Either of the FINISHING, DUPLEXING, 2IN1/
4IN1, IMAGE SHIFT, DUAL PAGE or ID CARD function is allocated to this custom function.
This code is used to specify the copy function, which is allocated as a custom function.
3
Description
When this code is used, the copy function, which is registered as a custom function, is reset.

0: FINISHING
1: DUPLEXING
2: 2IN1-4IN1
3: IMAGE SHIFT
4: DUAL PAGE
5: ID CARD
* Default: 0

* On the e-STUDIO165/e-STUDIO205, the custom function is set according to the following opera-
tion:
[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [COPY SETUP] --> [MENU CUSTOMIZE]

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the custom function.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 95
08-638

Time Differences

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify an appropriate time zone of a region, where the equipment is installed, in
accordance with UTC (Coordinated Universal Time).
The set value is applied to DATE in the header information when e-mail is transmitted or when a fax is
transmitted through the Internet.

Description
When this code is used, the time zone of the region, where the equipment is installed, is reset

0: +12.0 H 16: +4.0 H 32: -4.0 H


1: +11.5 H 17: +3.5 H 33: -4.5 H
2: +11.0 H 18: +3.0 H 34: -5.0 H
3: +10.5 H 19: +2.5 H 35: -5.5 H
4: +10.0 H 20: +2.0 H 36: -6.0 H
5: +9.5 H 21: +1.5 H 37: -6.5 H
6: +9.0 H 22: +1.0 H 38: -7.0 H
7: +8.5 H 23: +0.5 H 39: -7.5 H
8: +8.0 H 24: 0.0 H 40: -8.0 H
9: +7.5 H 25: -0.5 H 41: -8.5 H
10: +7.0 H 26: -1.0 H 42: -9.0 H
11: +6.5 H 27: -1.5 H 43: -9.5 H
12: +6.0 H 28: -2.0 H 44: -10.0 H
13: +5.5 H 29: -2.5 H 45: -10.5 H
14: +5.0 H 30: -3.0 H 46: -11.0 H
15: +4.5 H 31: -3.5 H 47: -11.5 H
* Default: JPN (Japan Standard Time): 6
UC (Pacific Standard Time): 40
EUR (UTC or Coordinated Universal Time): 24

* The time zone is set on the TopAccess according to the following operation:
[Administration] --> [Setup] --> [General] --> [Date & Time]

Setting Timing
Use this code, if the time zone is reset because the equipment is relocated to another region.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless the equipment is relocated to another region.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 96
08-641

Automatic Sorting Mode Setting (When Using ADF/RADF) (Copy


Function)

Purpose
This code is used to specify the finishing mode (non-sort, sort and rotate sort), which is displayed as the
default on the control panel and used by priority, when the ADF/RADF is used to copy.

Description
When this code is used, the finishing mode, which is used by priority, is reset when the ADF/RADF is
used. 3
0: Non-sort
2: Sort
4: Rotate Sort
* Default: 2

* 4 can be selected only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the finishing mode option, which is used by priority, when
the ADF/RADF is used.

Caution
The finishing mode, which is used by priority, is applied, only if an original is placed on the ADF/RADF.
Use "Default setting of sorter mode (08-642)" to reset the finishing mode, when the original is placed on
the original glass, or when the auto-clear function starts up or the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is
pressed after the original is placed on the ADF/RADF.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 97
08-642

Default Setting of Sorter Mode (Copy Function)

Purpose
This code is used to specify the finishing mode (non-sort, sort and rotate sort), which is displayed as the
default on the control panel and used by priority during the copy operation.

Description
When this code is used, the finishing mode, which is used by priority during the copy operation, is reset.

0: Non-sort
1. Group
5: Rotate Sort
6: Magazine Sort
* Default: 1

* 5 and 6 can be selected only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the finishing mode, which is used by priority during the
copy operation.

Caution
The finishing mode, which is used by priority, is applied, only if an original is placed on the original
glass, or when the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed or the auto-clear function starts up after the
original is placed on the ADF/RADF Use "Automatic sorting mode setting (when using ADF/RADF) (08-
641)" to reset the finishing mode, when the original is placed on the ADF/RADF.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 98
08-649

Magazine Sort Setting (Copy Function)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether to lay out odd-numbered pages on the right-hand side of the copy
set, with characters written horizontally or on the left-hand side, with characters written vertically, when
the magazine sort function is used.

Description
3
When this code is used, whether to lay out odd-numbered pages on the right-hand side or left-hand
side of the copy set is reset when the magazine sort function is used.

0: The odd-numbered pages are laid on the right-hand side


1: The odd-numbered pages are laid on the left-hand side
* Default: 0

Example: When a 12-page original is magazine sorted


<To lay out odd-numbered pages on the right-hand side>

A book, whose odd-numbered pages


are laid on its right-hand side

<To lay out odd-numbered pages on the left-hand side>

A book, whose odd-numbered pages


are laid on its left-hand side

* The page layout when the magazine sort function is used is set according to the following operation:
[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [COPY SETUP] --> [MAGAZINE SORT]

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 99
Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the page layout, when the magazine sort function is
used.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 100
08-650

2-in-1/4-in-1 Page Allocating Order Setting (Copy Function)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the page layout, which is displayed as the default on the control panel and
used by priority, when the 2-in-1 or 4-in-1 function is used.

Description
When this code is used, the page layout, which is used by priority, is reset when the 2-in-1 or 4-in-1 3
function is used.

0: Original with characters written horizontally


1: Original with characters written vertically
* Default: 0

<Example: When the 2 -in-1 function is used to copy>

Original with characters written horizontally Original with characters written vertically
Copy image Orientation of the originals

<Example: When the 4 -in-1 function is used to copy>

Original with characters written horizontally Original with characters written vertically

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the page layout, which is used by priority, when the 2-in-1 or 4-in-1 function is
used.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 101
08-655

Reset 05/08 Codes

Purpose
This code is used to reset the set values for 05 ADJUSTMENT codes and 08 SETTING codes (in the
PPC FUNC area) to their default values.

Description
When this code is used, the set values for 05 ADJUSTMENT codes and 08 SETTING codes (in the
PPC FUNC area) are reset to their default values.

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the set values for 05 ADJUSTMENT codes and 08 SETTING codes (in the PPC
FUNC area) to their default values, after replacing the SRAM board.

Caution
If this code is performed, every set value, which has been adjusted individually at the request of a
user, is reset to its default value. Therefore, carefully perform the setting.
Print the current value for each code in list print mode, and then perform this code. Check the
printed list and enter the set value for each code, in order to restore the set values to the state
before this code is performed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 102
08-660/661

Auto-Forwarding Setting of Received FAX/E-mail

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Fax Kit, Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External
Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
An incoming fax or e-mail image can be forwarded to a client PC by e-mail, transmitted by the Internet
FAX, or saved in the shared folder or e-Filing of the equipment, according to the forwarding option
entered in [Administration] on the TopAccess.
These codes are used to specify whether or not to use the auto-forwarding function. 3
A destination e-mail address to forward the image does not need to be entered in the address book in
advance. Instead, a user can select whether to enter the e-mail address directly, or use the address
book or the group, in order to set on the TopAccess.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
08-660 Auto-forwarding setting of received fax
08-661 Auto-forwarding setting of received e-mail

Description
When these codes are used, whether or not to automatically forward an incoming fax or e-mail is reset.

0: Does not forward


1: Automatically forwards
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use these codes to automatically forward an incoming fax or e-mail.

Caution
If forwarding by e-mail or Internet FAX is selected, incoming images are forcibly printed out.
A forwarding destination e-mail address does not need to be entered in the address book in
advance.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 103
08-666

BOX Partition Clearing

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
An area specifically for storing TWAIN image data captured when the scanner function is used is allo-
cated to the CF (Compact Flash) for the Scanner Upgrade Kit.
In the event this partition is corrupted for some reason, or in order to forcibly clear the partition, use this
code to clear and initialize the partition.

Description
When this code is used, the partition of the area storing TWAIN image data is cleared.

Setting Timing
Use this code, in the event the BOX partition is corrupted for some reason.
Use this code, in order to clear the BOX partition for some reason.

Caution
If this code is used to initialize the BOX partition, all TWAIN image data, which has been stored, is
cleared.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 104
08-669

System All Clearing

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to initialize the adjustment values and set values, which are stored in the SRAM on
the Network Printer Kit control board.

Important: 3
Never perform this code. If this code is performed, the value set for the SRAM returns to its
default at the start of factory assembly (factory pre-adjustment).

Description
Never perform this code.

Setting Timing
None.

Caution
Never perform this code.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 105
08-672

Initialization of Department Management Information

Purpose
This code is used to initialize all department management information registered.

* On the e-STUDIO163, information registered when the access code function is used.

* Example of the use of this code:


If the memory area storing department management information is corrupted for some accident,
"Enter Department Code" appears even if the department management function is not set. In this
case, use this code to initialize the area. Department management information is normally initialized
at factory shipping.

Description
When the [START] button is pressed after the value is set, all department management information is
initialized.

Setting Timing
Use this code, if "Enter Department Code" appears even if the department management function is
not set. (In the event the area storing the department management information is corrupted.)
Use this code, in order to destroy and initialize all department management information.

Caution
If this code is performed, all department management information registered is cleared. Therefore,
carefully perform the setting.
Do not use this code just to reset the counter for all departments. Instead, reset the counter on the
control panel according to the following operation:
[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [DEPARTMENT CODE] --> key in 1 (depart-
ment number for master code) --> [COUNT CLEAR]

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 106
08-684/686

Rebuilding Databases

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit and Scanner Upgrade Kit are installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to rebuild the databases in the equipment.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Applied to 3
08-684 Rebuilding all databases related to the address book
08-686 Rebuilding all databases related to the telephone book

Description
When these codes are used, the databases are rebuilt.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to reconfigure or rebuild the databases.

Caution
If these codes are performed, all information in the address book or telephone book is initialized (or
cleared). Therefore, carefully perform the setting.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 107
08-685

Duplex Printing by Alternate Circulation

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) is installed.

Purpose
The equipment can print two sheets of paper by alternately circulating them internally, while continu-
ously feeding the next sheet without waiting for the one where a copy of one side is made to exit in
duplexing mode. This code is used to specify whether or not to enable duplex printing by alternate cir-
culation.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable duplex printing by alternate circulation is reset.

0: Disables
1: Enables
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to enable duplex printing by alternate circulation in duplexing mode.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 108
08-690

CF Formatting

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to format the CF (Compact Flash) for the Scanner Upgrade Kit.

Description
3
When this code is used, the area storing TWAIN image data, address book data and templates is for-
matted and the CF returns to its initial state.

Setting Timing
None.

Caution
Never perform this code.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 109
08-691

Template Function Setting

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
In scanner mode, when the one-touch buttons from 66 to 75 are allocated for templates and
pressed, the templates set on the TopAccess are available. This code is used to specify whether or not
to use this template function.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to use the template function is reset.

0: Uses
1: Does not use
* Default: 1

* On the e-STUDIO165/205, the template function is set according to the following operation:
[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [INITIAL SETUP] --> [TEMPLATE]

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the template function.

Caution
If the template function is used, no address can be entered in the telephone book when the one-touch
buttons from 66 to 75 are allocated.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 110
08-693

Initialization of NIC Information

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to reset the NIC (Network Interface Card included in the Network Printer Kit control
board) to the initial state.

Description
3
When this code is used, the NIC is initialized.

Setting Timing
Use this code, in the event a NIC malfunction occurs for some reason.

Caution
If this code is performed, all NIC information is initialized. Therefore, it is necessary to reconfigure it.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 111
08-695

Toner Remaining Check Function (Supports Embedded IC chip)

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to detect that the toner cartridge is properly installed, and
whether or not to detect that the toner cartridge properly installed is a recommended one.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to use the function to check the remaining amount of toner is
reset.

0: Does not check


1: Checks
* Default: CND: 0, Others: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code, in order to use a toner cartridge other than the recommended
ones.

Caution
If the set value is reset, the set value for Toner near empty threshold value (08-971) is also reset as
follows automatically:
If 0 is set for code 08-695, 3 is set for code 08-971, and the function to detect the remaining
amount of toner is turned OFF.
If 1 is set for code 08-695, 1 is set for code 08-971, and the function to detect the remaining
amount of toner is turned ON.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 112
08-698

Limit Function for the Number of Paper Exit

Purpose
This code is used to limit the number of paper continuously exits per job, in order to prevent the exit
paper from falling out of the exit tray or from jamming when the paper exit is blocked by the paper piled
up.
If the number of paper continuously exits exceeds the limit number, the equipment suspends opera-
tions, lights up or flashes the lamp on the control panel, and displays a message.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to use the function to limit the number of paper exits is reset.
3

0: Does not limit the number of paper exits


1: Limits the number of paper exits
* Default: 1

* The limit number of paper exits is set for Limit number setting for paper exit (08-699).

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to cancel the limitation on the number of paper exits.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 113
08-699

Limit Number Setting for Paper Exit

Purpose
The equipment has the function to limit the number of paper continuously exits per job, in order to pre-
vent the exit paper from falling out of the exit tray or from jamming when the paper exit is blocked by the
paper piled up.
This code is used to set the number of paper continuously exits per job.

Description
When this code is used, the number of paper continuously exits per job, is specified.

Set value = Limited number of paper

* Acceptable values: 1 to 999


* Default: 250 (sheets of paper)

* Whether or not to use the function to limit the number of paper exits is specified for Limit function for
the number of paper exit (08-698).

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the limit number of paper exits.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 114
08-702/703/707/710/711/715 to 721/723/726 to 730/772/773/780 to 790/
796

TOSHIBA Remote Device Management System (RDMS) Related Setting

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
The "TOSHIBA Remote Device Management System (RDMS)" is a system, which enables remote
administration of device information of the equipment via the Internet. These codes are required to
enable communications between the "Device Management Portal (DMP)", which is installed over the 3
Internet, and the equipment.
The equipment transmits information of each counter type, service call error information, usage condi-
tion of supplies, etc. to the DMP. A service administrator can remote control such information by
accessing to the DMP.

Description
1) RDMS setting
Code Description Set value
08-702 RDMS Function Setting In order to enable this setting, "valid
If "invalid" is set, device information is not trans- (DMP)" is set at the equipment.
mitted to the DMP (RDMS does not function). 0: Valid (DMP), 1: Valid (DMC),
2: Invalid
* Default: 2

2) Proxy setting (A network environment with the proxy)


Code Description Set value
08-726 HTTP Proxy Setting 0: Valid, 1: invalid
This code is used to specify whether or not to * Default: 1
enable the proxy setting.
08-727 HTTP Proxy IP Address Setting 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
This code is used to enter the IP address * Default: 000.000.000.000
obtained from the user.
Be sure to enter in "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" format.
e.g. 192.168.010.001
08-728 HTTP Proxy Port Number Setting Acceptable values: 0 to 65535
This code is used to enter the port number * Default: 0
obtained from the user.
08-729 HTTP Proxy ID Setting Maximum 30 letters
This code is used to enter the ID obtained from
the user.
08-730 HTTP Proxy Password Setting Maximum 30 letters
This code is used to enter the password obtained
from the user.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 115
3) RDMS Initial Registration
Perform the settings for initial registration in order to communicate with the DMP.
Code Description Set value
08-718 Remote-controlled Service Initial Registration 0: OFF, 1: Start, 2: Only certification is
This code is used to complete all settings regard- scanned
ing the RDMS and set "start" during initial regis- * Default: 0
tration.
08-720 Check the status of remote-controlled service ini- 0: Not registered, 1: Registered
tial registration. * Default: 0
08-707 Remote-controlled Service initially-registered Maximum 256 letters
URL * Default:
Only the URL is checked because the URL https//device.mfp.support.com:
shown on the right has been entered as the 443/device/community.ashx
default.
Note:
Note:
Use the above default value, unless other-
wise required.
08-772 Dealer's Name Maximum 100 letters
08-773 DMP Login Name Maximum 20 letters
This code is used to enter the login name
obtained from the DMP Management.
08-719 Tentative Password Maximum 10 letters
This code is used to enter the tentative password
obtained from the DMP Management.

4) Periodical communication setting


Set the access timing, etc. to the DMP.
Code Description Set value
08-703 Remote-controlled Service HTTP Server URL Maximum 256 letters
Setting
This code is used to enter the URL of the DMP
obtained from the DMP Management.
08-710 Recovery Mode Time Setting of Emergency Short Acceptable values: 1 to 48 (hours)
Interval Communication Mode * Default: 24 (hours)
Recovery time interval from the emergency to
normal mode
08-711 Interval Setting of Emergency Short Interval Acceptable values: 30 to 360 (minutes)
Communication Mode * Default: 60 (minutes)
08-715 Polling Timing Setting 00:00 to 23:59
This code is used to set the polling timing. e.g. Enter "1330" to transmit at 13:30.
* Default: 1230
08-716 Remote-controlled Service Self-diagnosis Code 0: Prohibited, 1: Accepted
Writing * Default: 0
08-717 Response Waiting Time (Timeout) Setting Acceptable values: 1 to 30 (minutes)
This code is used to set the disconnection time of * Default: 3 (minutes)
communication when there is no response from
the DMP.
08-780 Specified Polling Day Selection Day-1 of Month 0: OFF, 1 to 31: 1st to 31st day of a
This code is used to set the month and day of the month
polling day. * Default: 0
08-781 Specified Polling Day Selection Day-2 of Month 0: OFF, 1 to 31: 1st to 31st day of a
This code is used to set the month and day of the month
polling day. * Default: 0
08-782 Specified Polling Day Selection Day-3 of Month 0: OFF, 1 to 31: 1st to 31st day of a
This code is used to set the month and day of the month
polling day. * Default: 0

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 116
Code Description Set value
08-783 Specified Polling Day Selection Day-4 of Month 0: OFF, 1 to 31: 1st to 31st day of a
This code is used to set the month and day of the month
polling day. * Default: 0
08-784 Specified Polling Day of the Week (Sunday) 0: OFF, 1: ON
* Default: 0
08-785 Specified Polling Day of the Week (Monday) Specified Polling Day of the Week
(Monday)
* Default: 0
08-786 Specified Polling Day of the Week (Tuesday) 0: OFF, 1: ON
* Default: 0
08-787 Specified Polling Day of the Week (Wednesday) 0: OFF, 1: ON
* Default: 0
08-788 Specified Polling Day of the Week (Thursday) 0: OFF, 1: ON
* Default: 0 3
08-789 Specified Polling Day of the Week (Friday) 0: OFF, 1: ON
* 0: OFF, 1: ON
08-790 Specified Polling Day of the Week (Saturday) 0: OFF, 1: ON
* Default: 0
08-796 Specified End of Month Polling 0: OFF, 1: ON
This code is used to specify whether or not to poll * Default: 0
at the end of the month.

5) Service center call function setting


Set the notification method and destination when a service center call error occurs.
Code Description Set value
08-721 Service Center Call 0: Valid, 1: Notifies all, 2: Notifies other
than a jam
* Default: 2
08-723 Service Center Call HTTP Server URL Setting Maximum 256 letters
When a service call error occurs, this code is * Never change the initial setting
used to transmit the error content to the specified without instructions.
HTTP server.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to remote control information of the equipment using the RDMS.

Caution
Obtain the following information and then use these codes:

Information to be obtained from the DMP Management.


- URL of the DMP
- HTTP port number of the DMP
- URL for DMP initial registration
- HTTP port number for DMP initial registration
- Login name of the DMP
- Login name of the DMP
- Tentative password for DMP

Information to be obtained from the user.


- IP address of the HTTP proxy server
- Port number of the HTTP proxy server
- D of the HTTP proxy server
- Password for the HTTP proxy server

Check the date and time, make corrections if necessary, and then use these codes.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 117
08-712/713/714

250 sheets limitation for output pages

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
When the printer function or Fax reception function is used to print, these codes are used to limit the
number of paper continuously exits per job, in order to prevent the exit paper from falling out of the exit
tray or from jamming when the paper exit is blocked by the paper piled up.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
08-712 Function to limit the number of paper continuously exits per print job when the GDI printer
function is used
08-713 Function to limit the number of paper continuously exits per print job when the network
printer function is used
08-714 Function to limit the number of paper continuously exits per print job when the Fax function
is used

Description
When these codes are used, whether or not to use the function to limit the number of paper exits is
reset.

0: Does not limit the number of paper exits


1: Limits the number of paper exits
* Default: 0

* The limit number of paper exits is set for Limit number setting for paper exit (08-699).

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to cancel the limitation on the number of paper exits.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 118
08-767 to 771/775 to 778

Service Notification Function Setting

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This equipment installs the "Service Notification Function," which notifies a service engineer of the
equipment status (each counter information, service call error information, and PM counter information)
by e-mail.
These codes are necessary in order to use the service notification function.
3
Description

Code Description Set value


08-767 Service Notification Setting 0: Invalid, 1: Valid
* If "Invalid" is set, the service notification func- * Default: 0
tion becomes invalid.
08-768 Destination E-mail Address 1 Maximum 192 letters
This code is used to enter a destination e-mail
address.
* Set values for codes 08-777/778 in the same
manner to designate several addresses.
08-769 Total Counter Information transmission setting 0: Invalid, 1: Valid
This code is used to specify whether or not to * Default: 0
perform the total counter information transmis-
sion.
08-770 Total Counter Transmission Interval Setting 1 to 31 (1st to 31st day)
This code is used to specify whether or not to * Default: 1 (1st day)
perform the total counter transmission on which
day of each month.
08-771 PM Counter Information Transmission Setting 0: Invalid, 1: Valid
This code is used to specify whether or not to * Default: 0
perform the PM counter information transmission.
08-775 Error Contents of Equipment Transmission Set- 0: Invalid, 1: Valid
ting * Default: 0
This code is used to specify whether or not to
transmit error contents of the equipment.
08-776 Setting Total Counter Transmission Time 00:00 to 23:59
This code is used to set the transmission time. e.g. Enter "1330" to transmit at 13:30.
08-777 Destination E-mail Address 2 Maximum 192 letters
This code is used to enter a destination e-mail
address
08-778 Destination E-mail Address 3 Maximum 192 letters
This code is used to enter a destination e-mail
address.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to automatically notify a service engineer of the equipment status using the service
notification function.

Caution
The network setting is necessary in order to send e-mail in advance.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 119
08-805 to 809/814/818/819/826/864 to 867

Main Charger Grid Bias Correction (Copy/Printer/Fax Function)

* Code 08-818 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to correct the printing density, while correcting the main charger grid bias output
value, which is adjusted for "Main charger grid bias output adjustment (05-210)" in toner save mode
and original mode.
A code specifically in transparency film mode is provided other than the validated codes in all modes.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Applied to Function mode
08-805 Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode Printer (PCL/PS)
(General)
08-806 Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode
(Toner save mode)
08-814 Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode Printer (GDI)
(GDI)
08-807 Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode Copy
(General)
08-808 Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode
(Text)
08-809 Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode
(Photo)
08-826 Main charger bias correction (Toner save mode) Printer (PCL/PS)
08-864 Main charger bias correction (General)
08-819 Main charger bias correction (GDI) Printer (GDI)
08-865 Main charger bias correction (General) Copy
08-866 Main charger bias correction (Text)
08-867 Main charger bias correction (Photo)
08-818 Main charger bias correction (Fax) Fax

Description
When these codes are used, the negative DC voltage of the main charger grid bias, which is output
from the high-voltage transformer, is reset. As the set value is increased, the main charger grid voltage
becomes higher (or more negative) and the main charger voltage potential on the drum surface
becomes higher (or more negative). Then the amount of toner attracted onto the latent image, which is
formed on the drum, is decreased. This results in the lower printing density.
On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the main charger grid voltage becomes lower and the
main charger voltage potential on the drum surface becomes lower (or more neutral). Then the amount
of toner attracted onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is increased. This results in the
higher printing density.
The variation in the amount of the main charger grid bias voltage per bit is approximately 3V.

0 to 255 (bit value)


* Default: 08-805 to 809/814: 98, 08-818/819/826/864 to 867: 128

Setting Timing
Use these codes to correct the printing density, while correcting the main charger grid bias output
value in each mode.
Use these codes to correct the printing density, while correcting the main charger grid bias output
value specifically in transparency film mode.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 120
Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.
Image problems such as a carrier pulling, foggy image may occur, unless "Developer bias correction
(08-833 to 837/840/857 to 863)" are adjusted concurrently with these codes.
For example, if the main charger grid bias is corrected to +10 bit (.-30V), the developer bias output
needs to be set to +6 bit (.-30V) accordingly.
Descriptions for codes 08-826/864 to 867 affect transparency film mode. Therefore, set these codes
and then use codes 08-805 to 809 specifically in transparency film mode.
Descriptions for codes 08-814/819 affect the print operation when the GDI printer function is used.
Descriptions for codes 08-805/806/826/864 affect the print operation when the PCL/PS printer func-
tion (Network Printer Kit) is used.
Descriptions for code 08-865 affect the test pattern print operation built into the equipment.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 121
08-830/868/869

Transfer DC Correction

Purpose
These codes are used to correct the printing density, while correcting the transfer DC output value,
which is adjusted in "Transfer DC output adjustment (05-220 to 222)" at the leading edge, center and
trailing edge of paper.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
08-830 Transfer DC output correction (C), center of paper
08-868 Transfer DC output correction (H), leading edge of paper
08-869 Transfer DC output correction (L), trailing edge of paper

Description
When these codes are used, the transfer DC output is corrected.
As the set value is increased, the transfer current becomes higher (or more positive) and the main
charger voltage potential of the paper surface becomes higher (or more positive). The amount of toner
transferred from the drum onto the paper is increased and the printing density becomes higher. On the
other hand, as the set value is decreased, the transfer current becomes lower. The amount of toner
transferred from the drum onto the paper is decreased and the printing density becomes lower.

0 to 255 (bit value)


* Default value: 128

Setting Timing
Use these codes, if the condition of the transferred image at the leading edge, center and trailing edge
is poor due to the paper used or the operating environment.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 122
08-831/870/871

Separation DC Output Correction

Purpose
These codes are used to correct the separation status, while correcting the separation transformer DC
output adjusted in "Separation DC output adjustment (05-233 to 235)" at the leading edge, center and
trailing edge of paper.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
08-831 Separation DC output correction (C), center of paper
3
08-870 Separation DC output correction (H), range at approx. 11 mm from the leading edge of
paper
08-871 Separation DC output correction (L), ranges at approx. 11 to 46 mm from the leading edge
of paper and at approx. 48 mm from the trailing edge of paper

Description
As the set value is increased, the DC voltage becomes higher, and the positive electric charge on paper
becomes lower. Then separation becomes easy. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the
DC voltage becomes lower, and the ratio of positive electric charge on paper to become lower is
decreased. Then separation becomes difficult.

* Default value: 128


* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: difficult to separate, 255: easy to separate)

Setting Timing
Use these codes, if the separation condition is poor, depending on paper being used and environment.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.
Note that when the separation DC output is increased too much, poor transfer (avatar) may occur.
Decrease the separation DC output, if poor transfer (avatar) occurs. Note that when the separation
DC output is decreased too much, paper separation efficiency may be decreased.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 123
08-833 to 837/840/857 to 863

Developer Bias Correction (Copy/Printer/Fax Function)

* Code 08-857 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to correct the printing density, while correcting the developer bias output value,
which is adjusted in "Developer bias output adjustment (05-205)" in toner save mode and original
mode.
A code specifically in transparency film mode is provided other than the validated codes in all modes.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Applied to Function mode
08-833 Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (General) Printer (PCL/PS)
08-834 Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (Toner save
mode)
08-840 Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (GDI) Printer (GDI)
08-835 Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (General) Copy
08-836 Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (Text)
08-837 Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (Photo)
08-859 Developer bias correction (Toner save mode) Printer (PCL/PS)
08-860 Developer bias correction (General)
08-858 Developer bias correction (GDI) Printer (GDI)
08-861 Developer bias correction (General) Copy
08-862 Developer bias correction (Text)
08-863 Developer bias correction (Photo)
08-857 Developer bias correction (Fax) Fax

Description
When these codes are used, the negative DC voltage of the developer bias, which is output from the
high-voltage transformer, is reset. As the set value is increased, the developer bias output voltage
becomes higher (or more negative) and the amount of toner attracted from the developer sleeve (mag-
netic roller) onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is increased. This results in the higher
printing density. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the developer bias output voltage
becomes lower and the amount of toner attracted onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is
decreased. This results in the lower printing density.
The variation in the amount of the developer bias voltage per bit is approximately 5V.

0 to 255 (bit value)


* Default: 08-833 to 837/840: 107, 08-857 to 863: 128

Setting Timing
Use these codes to correct the printing density, while correcting the developer bias output value in
each mode.
Use these codes to correct the printing density, while correcting the developer bias output value
specifically in transparency film mode.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 124
Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.
Image problems such as a carrier adhesion, foggy image may occur, unless "Main charger grid bias
correction (08-805 to 809/814/818/819/826/864 to 867)" are adjusted concurrently with these codes.
For example, if the developer bias output is set to +6 bit (.-30V), the main charger grid bias needs to
be corrected to +10 bit (.-30V) accordingly.
Descriptions for codes 08-859 to 863 affect transparency film mode. Therefore, set these codes and
then use codes 08-833 to 837 specifically in transparency film mode.
Descriptions for codes 08-840/858 affect the print operation when the GDI printer function is used.
Descriptions for codes 08-833/834/859/860 affect the print operation when the PCL/PS printer func-
tion (Network Printer Kit) is used.
Descriptions for code 08-861 affect the test pattern print operation built into the equipment.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 125
08-838

Recycled Toner Saving Control Switching

Purpose
The toner recycling mechanism is installed in the equipment. If the process unit (cleaner and developer
unit) becomes hot and toner remains in the transportation path for recycled toner, toner also becomes
hot and its performance may degrade. If the drum thermistor detects the hot process unit (40C or
more), another 20 seconds are added to the period for toner transportation, in order to completely
transport toner remaining in the transportation path into the developer unit, at the end of printing. Then,
the cooling fan rotates for 120 seconds, in order to cool down the transportation path for recycled toner.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to use the recycled toner saving control is reset.

0: Enable (Control is enabled.)


1: Disable (Control is disabled.)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to "Disable" the toner saving control, because it is frequently operated.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.
When "Disable" is set, the internal equipment becomes hot due to continuous printing, and toner
degrades in the transportation path for recycled toner by a high temperature. Problems such as a
locked transportation area for recycled toner or foggy image may occur.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 126
08-839

Correction by Temperature/Humidity

Purpose
The temperature and humidity sensor detects the temperature and humidity of outside air captured in
the equipment, in order to prevent print quality from being affected by the temperature and humidity in a
location where the equipment is installed. The auto-toner sensor output, transfer DC output, main
charger bias, separation DC output, developer bias and laser output are corrected based on the result.
This code is used to specify whether or not correct the temperature and humidity on these outputs.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not correct the temperature and humidity on the auto-toner sensor
3
output, each bias output and laser output is reset.

0: All valid (Collects all)


1: All invalid (Does not collect)
2: Corrects only the auto-toner sensor output
3: All valid except transfer and separation
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset temperature and humidity correction items.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 127
08-872/873/875 to 877/883/884

Laser Power Correction (Copy/Printer/Fax Function)

* Code 08-884 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the image, while correcting the laser power adjusted in "Laser power
adjustment (05-286)" in toner save mode or original mode.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Applied to Function mode
08-872 Laser output correction (General) Printer (PCL/PS)
08-875 Laser output correction (Toner save mode)
08-883 Laser output correction (GDI) Printer (GDI)
08-873 Laser output correction (General) Copy
08-876 Laser output correction (Text)
08-877 Laser output correction (Photo)
08-884 Laser output correction (Fax) Fax

Description
As the set value is increased, the laser output increases and the printing density becomes higher. On
the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the laser output decreases and the printing density
becomes lower.

0 to 255 (bit value)


* Default: 08-872/873/875/876/877: 128, 08-883: 136, 08-884: 110

Setting Timing
Use these codes to adjust the image, while correcting the laser power in toner save mode and original
mode.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.
Descriptions for code 08-883 affect the print operation when the GDI printer function is used.
Descriptions for codes 08-872/875 affect the print operation when the PCL/PS printer function (Net-
work Printer Kit) is used.
Descriptions for code 08-873 affect the test pattern print operation built into the equipment.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 128
08-886

Temperature Drop Control Setting in Ready State (Temperature/Time)

Purpose
This code used to set the pattern to control the temperature drop in the ready state. In the control pat-
tern, the drop temperature and drop timing to control the temperature drop are set. When this code is
used to reset the pattern to control the temperature drop of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided.

Description
When this code is used, the pattern to control the temperature drop (drop temperature, drop timing) in
the ready state is reset
3
0: No temperature drop control
1 to 19: Patterns 1 to 19
20: Temperature and timing selected optionally
* Default: 4

* Set value in the case of inconsistent fusing: 1

* Patterns 2, 3, 5 to 19: No need to use

Setting Timing
Set 1, if inconsistent fusing occurs when printing is performed after an extended period of time in
the ready state.
Set 20 in order to set the drop temperature and drop timing to control the temperature drop individ-
ually. Then, the set values for the following codes will be valid:
Temperature drop setting in ready state (08-404/405)
Temperature drop switching time setting in ready state (08-424/425)

Caution
If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully
perform the setting.
Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set
value.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 129
08-900/906

ROM Version Display

* Code 08-906 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
The electric circuits in the equipment are composed of multiple PC boards, whose roles and operations
are different. The CPU and FROM (flash ROM) are mounted on the MAIN board, which plays a critical
role. The CPU performs processing, based on the programs written in the ROM. This allows each unit
or section in the equipment to be operated. The CPU drive programs on the PFC board are written in
the FROM embedded in the CPU, which is mounted on the PFC board, in the same manner. These
codes are used to display and check the versions of the programs, which are stored in the flash ROM
on each board.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
08-900 System firmware ROM version display (FROM on the MAIN board)
08-906 PFC ROM version display (FROM embedded in the CPU on the PFC board)

Description
When these codes are used, the versions of the programs stored in each flash ROM are shown as fol-
lows:
(X: Major version, Y: Minor version)

08-900:
System ROM version (system firmware version):

e-STUDIO163/203:
XX-YYY

e-STUDIO165/205:
JPN: T208SY0UXXX
CND: T208SY0CXXX
Others: T208SY0WXXX

08-906:
PFC ROM version: XXX

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check the versions of the programs stored in the ROM on each board, after updat-
ing the firmware, such as the system firmware and engine firmware.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 130
08-905

Process for Last Page (one-sided original) at Duplex Copying

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether to simplex copy the one-sided last page or duplex copy the one-
sided last page where a blank page is added to the back of the one-sided last page to handle as an
even page original, when an odd page original is duplex copied.
3
Description
When this code is used, the method to copy the one-sided last page in duplex copying is specified.

0: Simplex copying
1: Duplex copying (Blank page is added)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the method to copy the one-sided last page in duplex
copying.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 131
08-921/1951

FROM Internal Program/ FROM Basic Section Software Version Display

* Code 08-1951 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* Code 08-1951 is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
The FROM (flash ROM), which is mounted on the MAIN board, contains equipment program data. The
FROM, which is mounted on the Network Printer Kit control board, contains network-related control
(print) programs. These codes are used to display and check the versions of these programs, which are
stored in each memory.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
08-921 Equipment program data version display
08-1951 CPU version display on the Network Printer Kit control board

Description
When these codes are used, the versions of the programs stored in each memory are shown as fol-
lows:

08-921:
Equipment program data version: VTHXX.YYY Z
* X: Major version, Y: Minor version
Z: Language code (JPN: J, CND: C, Others: W)

08-1951:
CPU version on the Network Printer Kit control board: X.YY/12
* X: Major version, Y: Minor version

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check the versions of the programs stored in each memory, after updating the sys-
tem firmware.

Caution
The following program data are stored in the flash ROM on the MAIN board. Use the following codes to
check the versions in 08 SETTING code.
System ROM (system firmware): 08-900
Equipment program data: 08-921
Function table data: 08-922
Language data: 08-923

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 132
08-922/923

Function Table Data Version / Language Data Version Display

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
The FROM (flash ROM), which is mounted on the SYS board, contains function table data and lan-
guage data. These codes are used to display and check the versions of these data.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Applied to 3
08-922 Function table data version display
08-923 Language data version display

Description
When these codes are used, the versions of function table data and language data stored in the flash
ROM are shown as follows:
(X: Version, Z: Language code (JPN: J, CND: C, Others: W))

08-922:
Function table data version: T282SY1ZXXX

08-923:
Language data version: T282SY2ZXXX

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check the versions of the programs stored in the flash ROM on the MAIN board,
after updating the system firmware.

Caution
The following program data is stored in the flash ROM on the MAIN board. Use the following codes to
check the versions in 08 SETTING code.
System ROM (system firmware): 08-900
Equipment program data: 08-921
Function table data: 08-922
Language data: 08-923

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 133
08-945

Port 9100 Bi-directional Communication ON/OFF

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
The port number 9100 is used to perform Raw TCP printing, when the equipment is used as a network
printer. (The port number can be selected for "Raw port number setting (08-1074).") This code is used
to specify whether to enable bi-directional communication or one-way (default) communication from a
client PC to the equipment, during data transmission through the port number 9100.
* Raw TCP/IP printing is available on a client's PC where Windows 2000 or Windows XP (IP-P2P
V3.12 tools, provided by CD for Windows 95/98/Me) is installed. The equipment does not corre-
spond to the bi-directional communication. However, this printing is available, if the network admin-
istrator permits the Raw TCP connection and validates the Raw TCP printing function at the print
service setting. In this case, this code is used to reset the data transmission conditions (bi-direc-
tional communication ON/OFF).

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable bi-directional communication through the port number
9100 is reset.

1: ON
2: OFF
* Default: 2

Setting Timing
Use this code to perform bi-directional communication through the port number 9100, when performing
Raw TCP printing.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 134
08-947

Initialization when Software is Upgraded

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to perform the necessary initialization of the internal process when software is
upgraded for the addition of functions and quality improvement.

Description
3
When the code is used, the initialization is performed for additional new functions, when software is
upgraded.

Setting Timing
Use this code when the software of the equipment is upgraded.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 135
08-949

Drum Reverse Rotation Specification Page Setting

Purpose
If poor quality paper, which generates a large amount of paper dust, is used, drum cleaning may be
improper carried out due to the paper dust. The equipment pauses printing and rotate the drum in the
opposite direction to print large quantities, in order to prevent drum cleaning from being improperly per-
formed. This code is used to specify conditions to rotate the drum in the opposite direction.

Description
When this code is used, the copy count is reset to rotate the drum in the opposite direction.

Set value x 10 pages = Copy count to rotate the drum in the opposite direction

0: Does not rotate the drum in the opposite direction


1 to 1000:
Pauses printing and rotates the drum in the opposite direction after printing the specified number
of pages (100 to 10,000 pages)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code, if drum cleaning is improperly carried out due to paper dust.
(When cleaning is improperly carried out, clean the cleaning blade and use this code prior to resuming
printing.)

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 136
08-970

Sound Setting When Switching to Energy Saver Mode

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to generate the beep tone when the equipment has been in
an idle state for a certain period of time, and switches to energy saver mode.

Description
When this code used, whether or not to generate the beep tone is reset, when the equipment switches 3
to energy saver mode.

0: OFF (No beep tone is generated.)


1: ON (The beep tone is generated.)
* Default: JPN: 0, Others: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to switch whether or not to generate the beep tone when the
equipment switches to energy saver mode.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 137
08-971

Toner Near Empty Threshold Value

Purpose
This code is used to reset the timing to detect the toner near end condition when the function to detect
the remaining amount of toner is used.
The function to detect the remaining amount of toner is available only when the recommended toner
cartridge is installed.

Description
When this code used, the timing to detect the toner near end condition is reset.

0: Near empty threshold value (Longer)


* The interval between the toner near end condition and toner end condition becomes longer.
1: Near empty threshold value (Center)
2: Near empty threshold value (Shorter)
* The interval between the toner near end condition and toner end condition becomes shorter.
3: No detection of the toner near end condition

* Default: CND: 3, Others: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the timing to detect the toner near end condition.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.
If 2 is set, the interval between the toner near end condition and toner end condition becomes
shorter. Therefore, No Toner is more likely to be detected before the toner near end condition is
detected, due to the variation or difference in the toner remaining in the toner cartridge.
If the set value for Toner remaining check function (supports embedded IC chip) (08-695) is reset,
the set value for code 08-971 is also reset as follows automatically:
- If 0 is set for code 08-695, 3 is set for code 08-971, and the function to detect the remaining
amount of toner is turned OFF.
- If 1 is set for code 08-695, 1 is set for code 08-971, and the function to detect the remaining
amount of toner is turned ON.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 138
08-973

PCL Line Feed Code Setting

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the printer line feed operation corresponding to the line feed code of the
printer control language (PCL), when the Network Printer Kit is used to print.

Description
3
When this code is used, the feed operation corresponding to the line feed code of the printer control
language (PCL) is reset.

0: Auto (Automatically determined)


1: CR = CR, LF = LF
2: CR = CR + LF, LF = LF
3: CR = CR, LF = CR + LF
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to specify the printer line feed operation corresponding to the line
feed code of the printer control language (PCL).

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 139
08-995

Equipment Number (Serial Number) Display

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
This code is used to enter the serial number of the equipment.

Description
When this code is used, a serial number is entered up to 20 digits.

* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to enter the serial number of the equipment.

Caution
Only the numeric values from 0 to 9 and alphabetic characters from A to Z are acceptable.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 140
08-1002

Selection of NIC Board Status Information

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to print out the NIC status, when the hardware is reset.
* At power-on, or when any setting where the initialization of the NIC is required on the control panel
or TopAccess, the hardware is reset.
3
Description
When this code is used, whether or not to print out the NIC status is specified, when the hardware is
reset.

1: Does not print, when the hardware is reset.


2: Prints, when the hardware is reset.
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to print out the NIC status.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 141
08-1003

Ethernet Speed / Communication Speed Setting

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the Ethernet speed and communication speed, depending on the network
environment where the equipment is connected.

Description
When this code is used, the Ethernet speed and communication speed are specified.

1: Auto
2: 10 Mbps Half Duplex
3: 10 Mbps Full Duplex
4: 100 Mbps Half Duplex
5: 100 Mbps Full Duplex
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
Change the set value from the default, if a network connection cannot be established properly by
default (Auto), due to compatibility with a hub.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 142
08-1006 to 1010/1112

TCP/IP

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to enable communications via TCP/IP.
TCP/IP needs to be set, in order to use the TopAccess, SMB printing, peer-to-peer printing, LPR print-
ing, IPP printing, e-mail transmission and Internet FAX functions.
3
Description

Code Description Set value


08-1006 Method of IP Addressing 1: Manual (fixed), 2: Auto (DHCP)
3: Does not handle Auto IP at auto (DHCP)
* Default: 2
08-1007 Domain Name Maximum 96 letters
08-1008 IP Address 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
If "1" (Manual (fixed)) is set for code 08- * Default: 000.000.000.000
1006, this code is used to enter the IP
address of the equipment. Enter an IP address in the following format:
Note:
Note: "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"
If "2" (Auto (DHCP)) is set for code e.g. 192.168.001.010
08-1006, never reset the set value.
(The set value will be bypassed.)
08-1009 Subnet Mask 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
If "1" (Manual (fixed)) is set for code 08- * Default: 000.000.000.000
1006, this code is used to enter a subnet
mask, when necessary. Enter a subnet mask in the following format:
Note:
Note: "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"
If "2" (Auto (DHCP)) is set for code e.g. 255.255.255.000
08-1006, never change the set value. Note:
Note:
(The set value will be bypassed.) Never set "000.000.000.000" or
"255.255.255.255" for a subnet
mask. Otherwise, the SMB function
will not be available, even if the SMB
protocol is enabled.
08-1010 Gateway 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
If the equipment is used via the router over * Default: 000.000.000.000
the network, this code is used to enter a
default gateway address. Enter a gateway address in the following for-
Note:
Note: mat:
If "2" (Auto (DHCP)) is set for code "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"
08-1006, never change the set e.g. 192.168.001.010
value.(The set value will be
bypassed.)
08-1112 Host Name Maximum 63 letters
* Default: MFP_serial

Setting Timing
Use these codes to use the TopAccess, SMB printing, peer-to-peer printing, LPR printing, IPP printing,
e-mail transmission and Internet FAX functions.

Caution
Refer to "Note" for each code described in the above table in Description.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 143
08-1011/1012

IPX/SPX

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to enable communications via IPX/SPX.
IPX/SPX needs to be set, in order to use the Novell printing functions via IPX/SPX, when the Net-Ware
server is used.

Description

Code Description Set value


08-1011 Availability of IPX 1: Available, 2: Not available
This code is used to specify whether or not to * Default: 1
enable IPX/SPX.
08-1012 Network Frame Type 1: Auto, 2: IEEE 802.3,
This code is used to select a network frame 3: Ethernet II, 4: IEEE 802.3 SNMP,
type, when necessary. 5: IEEE 802.2
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use these codes to use the Novell printing function via IPX/SPX, when the NetWare server is used.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 144
08-1013

Availability of NCP Burst

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to enable the burst transfer of print data in Novell NCP print-
ing.

Description
3
When this code is used, whether or not to enable the burst transfer is specified.

1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to improve print performance in the version of Novell NetWare 4.12 or later.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 145
08-1014/1015/1103 to 1105

AppleTalk

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to enable communications via AppleTalk.
AppleTalk needs to be set, in order to use the AppleTalk printing functions on a Macintosh-based com-
puter.

Description

Code Description Set value


08-1014 Availability of AppleTalk 1: Available, 2: Not available
This code is used to specify whether or not * Default: 1
to enable AppleTalk.
08-1015 Zone Setting of AppleTalk Maximum 32 letters
This code is used to enter a name of a zone * "* (wild card)" as a default value
where the equipment is connected to, when
necessary.
If no zone name is entered, the equipment is
connected to the default zone "*."
08-1103 Validity/Invalidity of Rendezvous 1: Valid, 2: Invalid
When Rendezvous is selected in the OSX Default: 1
with Web Browser "Safari," the equipment
over the network is automatically detected.
(The Service Name explained in code "08-
1105" is used for automatic detection.)
Access to the TopAccess is available by only
clicking the equipment name, which is
detected.
If a number of equipments are connected
over the network, a number such as "2", "3",
is added to the end of the service name of
the 2nd equipment or later on Safari.
08-1104 Link-Local Host Name Maximum 127 letters
This code is used to enter the equipment Default: MFP_serial
name.
08-1105 Service Name Maximum 63 letters
This code is used to enter the service name Default:
of the equipment for the Rendezvous func- * e-STUDIO163: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO163
tion. e-STUDIO163: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO203
This service name is used when the Ren- e-STUDIO165: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO165
dezvous function is used to search for the e-STUDIO205: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO205
equipment over the network.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to use the AppleTalk printing functions on a Macintosh-based computer.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 146
08-1017 to 1019

DNS

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to set a FQDN name to each server address, when DNS is used.
The availability of DNS and the DNS server address need to be set, in order to include the FQDN in the
address of the SMTP server (08-1038) or POP3 server (08-1047).
3
Description

Code Description Set value


08-1017 Availability of DNS 1: Available, 2: Not available
This code is used to specify whether or not * Default: 1
to enable DNS.
08-1018 IP Address to the primary DNS Server 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
* Default: 000.000.000.000

Enter an IP address in the following format:


"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"
e.g. 192.168.001.100
08-1019 IP Address to the secondary DNS Server 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
* Default: 000.000.000.000

Enter an IP address in the following format:


"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"
e.g. 192.168.001.010

Setting Timing
These codes are used to set a host name for the equipment, when DNS is used.

Caution
To search for the above host name on the DNS server where DNS is set, the target host name
needs to be registered on this DNS server.
For further information regarding the settings on the DNS server, contact a network administrator,
who is responsible for establishing the network environment with the equipment.
A host name is the name expressed after @ and before the following dot "." in the FQDN (e-mail
address) (e.g. user@host.domain).

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 147
08-1020

DDNS Desired Level

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to enable the dynamic DNS service, if the dynamic DNS is supported on the DNS
server.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable the dynamic DNS service is specified.

1: Invalid
2: Via DHCP
3: Insecure DDNS
4: Secure DDNS
5: Multi Secure DDNS
* Default: 3

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the dynamic DNS service.

Caution
DDNS of the equipment supports only two options, "Via DHCP" and "Insecure DDNS." "Via DHCP" is a
function, which uses the DNS registration function (registration function of record A) on the DHCP
server. "Insecure DDNS" is intended to register DNS directly on the DNS server. Even if other options
("Secure DDNS" and "Multi Secure DDNS") are selected, they will not function.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 148
08-1024/1025

Name of WINS Server

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to specify an IP address of the WINS server, when the WINS server is used to
share a file or printer between different subnets.

Description
3

Code Description Set value


08-1024 Name of WINS Server or IP Address (Pri- Enter an IP address in the following format:
mary) "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"
This code is used to enter an IP address of e.g. 192.168.001.010
the primary WINS server, if the WINS server Note:
Note:
it is used to provide a NetBios name and Never enter an IP address starting
workgroup name of the equipment. with "0" (e.g. 0.10.10.10) or "244"
Note:
Note: (e.g. 244.10.10.10).
If "2" (Auto (DHCP)) is set for code Numeric values are acceptable, but
08-1006, never reset the set value. not characters.
000.000.000.000" is set by default. If
Auto (DHCP) is selected, the
address is acquired on the DHCP
server. However, if some sort of IP
Address is registered, the address
cannot be acquired on the DHCP
server even if Auto (DHCP) is
selected.
08-1025 Name of WINS Server or IP Address (Sec- Enter an IP address in the following format:
ondary) "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"
This code is used to enter an IP address of e.g. 192.168.001.010
the secondary WINS server, if the WINS Note:
Note:
server is used to provide a NetBios name Never enter an IP address starting
and workgroup name of the equipment. with "0" (e.g. 0.10.10.10) or "244"
Note:
Note: (e.g. 244.10.10.10).
If "2" (Auto (DHCP)) is set for code Numeric values are acceptable, but
08-1006, never reset the set value. not characters.
000.000.000.000" is set by default. If
Auto (DHCP) is selected, the
address is acquired on the DHCP
server. However, if some sort of IP
Address is registered, the address
cannot be acquired on the DHCP
server even if Auto (DHCP) is
selected.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to share a file or printer between different subnets when the WINS server is used to
share a file or printer between different subnets.

Caution
Refer to "Note" for each code described in the above table in Description.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 149
08-1026 to 1029

NetWare

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to establish the Novell printing environment.

Description

Code Description Set value


08-1026 Availability of Bindery 1: Available, 2: Not available
This code is used to specify whether or not * Default: 1
to enable Novell printing in NetWare Bindery
mode.
08-1027 Availability of NDS 1: Available, 2: Not available
This code is used to specify whether or not * Default: 1
to enable Novell printing in NetWare NDS
mode.
* If "1" (available) is set, perform the set-
tings for codes 08-1028 and 1029.
08-1028 Directory Service Context Maximum 127 letters
This code is used to enter the NDS context
of the NetWare print server for the equip-
ment.
08-1029 Directory Service Tree Maximum 47 letters
This code is used to enter the NDS tree.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to establish the Novell printing environment.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 150
08-1030 to 1032

HTTP

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to use the Web-based utilities including the TopAccess and e-Filing Web Utility,
or to enable the Web-based services such as IPP printing.

Description
3

Code Description Set value


08-1030 Availability of HTTP Server 1: Available, 2: Not available
This code is used to specify whether or not * Default: 1
to enable the HTTP server.
08-1031 Port Number to NIC HTTP Server Acceptable values: 1 to 65535
This code is used to enter a port number for * Default: 80
HTTP access.
Normally, "80" is set.
Note:
Note:
Use the default value, unless other-
wise required.
08-1032 Port Number to System HTTP Server Acceptable values: 1 to 65535
This code is used to enter a port number for * Default: 8080
accessing the Web-based utilities including
the TopAccess and e-Filing Web Utility.
Normally, "8080" is set.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to:
Use the Web-based utilities including the TopAccess and e-Filing Web Utility.
Enable the Web-based services such as IPP printing.

Caution
If the port number to NIC HTTP server is changed from the default "80," the TopAccess is not available
on the Web browser. Therefore, use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 151
08-1037 to 1045/1100 to 1102/1111

SMTP

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to send and receive faxes through the Internet, when SMTP is used.

Description

Code Description Description


08-1037 Availability of SMTP Client 1: Available, 2: Not available
"1" (available) is set to transmit a fax through * Default: 1
the Internet from the equipment via the
SMTP server.
08-1038 FQDN or IP Address to SMTP Server Maximum 128 letters
This code is used to enter an IP address of
the SMTP server. Or enter the FQDN.
08-1039 TCP Port Number of SMTP Client Acceptable values: 1 to 65535
This code is used to enter a port number for * Default: 25
accessing the SMTP server.
Normally, "25" is set.
08-1040 Availability of SMTP Server 1: Available, 2: Not available
This code is used to specify whether or not * Default: 1
to use the equipment as the SMTP server.
"1" (available) is set to use the offramp gate-
way function.
08-1041 TCP Port Number of SMTP Server Acceptable values: 1 to 65535
This code is used to enter a port number to * Default: 25
receive a fax or e-mail through the Internet
via the SMTP server.
Normally, "25" is set.
08-1042 E-mail Box Name to SMTP Server Maximum 192 letters
This code is used to enter an e-mail address
assigned to the equipment.
08-1043 Availability of Offramp 1: Available, 2: Not available
This code is used to specify whether or not * Default: 2
to enable the offramp gateway transmission.
08-1044 Offramp Security 1: Available, 2: Not available
This code is used to specify whether or not * Default: 1
to enable the offramp gateway security.
If "1" (available) is set, the offramp gateway
transmission is applied only to the fax num-
ber registered in the address book of the
equipment.
08-1045 Printing at Offramp 1: Prints, 2. Does not print
This code is used to specify whether or not * Default: 1
to print a document forwarded, when the
offramp gateway function is used.
08-1100 SMTP authentication system 1: Plain, 2: Login, 3: Digest MD5,
4: Disable
* Default: 4
08-1101 Login Name for SMTP Authentication Maximum 64 letters
This code is used to enter the login name for
the equipment to access to the STMP
server.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 152
Code Description Description
08-1102 Login Password for SMTP Authentication Maximum 64 letters
This code is used to enter the password for
the equipment to access to the SMTP
server.
08-1111 Validity/Invalidity of POP before SMTP 1: Available, 2: Not available
This code is used to select whether or not to * Default: 4
transmit e-mail after the authentication by
POP is performed.
If "valid" is selected, unauthorized e-mail
transmission and disrupt can be prevented.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to send and receive faxes through the Internet, when SMTP is used.
3
Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 153
08-1046 to 1052/1097/1098

POP3

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to receive a fax through the Internet or an e-mail print job, when POP3 is used.

Description

Code Description Set value


08-1046 Availability of POP3 Clients 1: Available, 2: Not available
This code is used to specify whether or not * Default: 1
to enable the POP3 client function.
"1" (available) is set to retrieve a fax through
the Internet on the POP3 server.
08-1047 FQDN or IP Address to POP3 Server Maximum 128 letters
This code is used to enter an IP address of
the POP3 server.
Or enter the FQDN.
08-1048 Types of POP3 server 1: Auto, 2: POP, 3: APOP
This code is used to select a type of login to * Default: 1
the POP3 server.
08-1049 Login Name to POP3 Server Maximum 96 letters
This code is used to enter a login name,
allowing the equipment to access the POP3
server.
08-1050 Login Password to POP3 Server Maximum 96 letters
This code is used to enter a password,
allowing the equipment to access the POP3
server.
08-1051 E-mail Reception Interval Acceptable values: 0 to 4096 (0 to 4096 min-
This code is used to specify an interval until utes)
the equipment accesses the POP3 to check * Default: 5 (minutes)
presence of incoming messages.
08-1052 TCP Port Number of POP3 Server Acceptable values: 1 to 65535
This code is used to enter a port number for * Default: 110
accessing the POP3 server.
Normally, "110" is set.
08-1097 Number of Text Print Pages Control of E- Acceptable values: 1 to 99 (1 to 99 pages)
mail Reception * Default: 5 (pages)
This code is used to set the maximum num-
ber of pages of e-mail text to print.
08-1098 MDN Reply at E-mail Reception 1: Available, 2: Not available
This code is used to select whether or not to * Default: 2
automatically return a message, when e-
mail is received.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to receive a fax or an e-mail print job through the Internet, when POP3 is used.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 154
08-1055

FTP

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to send and receive data between the equipment and a computer over the network.

Description
When this code is used, a port number for accessing the FTP client is entered. 3
* Default: 21
* Acceptable values: 1 to 65535

Setting Timing
Use this code to send and receive data between the equipment and a computer over the network.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 155
08-1063/1065/1066/1069/1070/1099

SNMP

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to monitor a status of the equipment, when the SNMP network monitoring utility
is used.

Description

Code Description Set value


08-1063 MIB Function 1: Available, 2: Not available
This code is used to specify whether or not * Default: 1
to enable the MIB function.
"1" (available) is set to permit a user to use
the TopAccess, DocMon, TWAIN driver, File
Downloader and Address Book Viewer.
08-1065 Setting of Read Community Maximum 31 letters
This code is used to enter a trap community * Default: public
name for the SNMP trap.
08-1066 Setting of Read/Write Community Maximum 31 letters
This code is used to enter a private commu- * Default: private
nity name, which permits reading and writing
through SNMP communication.
08-1069 TRAP Destination IP address 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
This code is used to enter an IP address * Default: 000.000.000.000
where the SNMP trap is sent. Enter an IP address in the following format:
"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"
e.g. 192.168.001.010
08-1070 Community Setting of TRAP Maximum 31 letters
This code is used to enter a trap community * Default: public
name for the IP trap.
08-1099 IPX TRAP Destination Maximum 24 letters
Letters from 0 to F are valid (0 to 9, A to F).
The address is expressed as "n.n.n.n:m-m-m-
m-m-m:oo" and each letter is 1 byte (2 letters).
It is not required to separate each letters by "."
(dot), ":" (colon), and "-" (hyphen).
Each "n" is 1-byte data in binary, and indicates
the IPX Network Address.
Each "m" is 1-byte data in binary, and indicates
the MacAddress.
"oo" is 2-byte data in binary, and indicates the
socket number.

e.g.
000000010040af7db4b80001
Enter 12 bytes (24 letters), from 0 to F as shown
above.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to monitor a status of the equipment, when the SNMP network monitoring utility is
used.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 156
Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 157
08-1073/1074

Raw TCP Print

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to perform Raw TCP printing.

Description

Code Description Set value


08-1073 Availability of Raw TCP 1: Available, 2: Not available
This code is used to specify whether or not to * Default: 1
enable Raw TCP printing.
08-1074 TCP Port Number of Raw Acceptable values: 1 to 65535
This code is used to enter a port number for Raw * Default: 9100
TCP printing.
Normally, "9100" is set.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to perform Raw TCP printing.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 158
08-1075 to 1077

LPD Print

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to perform LPD (LPR) printing.

Description
3
Code Description Set value
08-1075 Availability of LPD Client 1: Available, 2: Not available
This code is used to specify whether or not to * Default: 1
enable LPD printing.
08-1076 TCP Port Number of LPD Acceptable values: 1 to 65535
This code is used to enter a port number for LPD * Default: 515
printing.
Normally, "515" is set.
08-1077 LPD Queue Name Maximum 31 letters
This code is used to enter an LPD queue name.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to perform LPD (LPR) printing.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 159
08-1078 to 1088

IPP Print

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to permit a user to perform IPP printing.

Description

Code Description Set value


08-1078 Availability of IPP 1: Available, 2: Not available
This code is used to specify whether or not * Default: 1
to enable IPP printing.
08-1079 Availability of IPP Port Number "80" 1: Available, 2: Not available
This code is used to specify whether or not * Default: 1
to enable port 80 in IPP printing.
Normally, port 631 is used for IPP access.
In this case, a user needs to specify the IPP
port number for an URL. Once "1" (avail-
able) is set, IPP access via port 80, which is
a standard port for HTTP access, is permit-
ted. Therefore, an IPP port number does not
need to be specified for an URL any more.
08-1080 TCP Port Number of IPP Acceptable values: 1 to 65535
This code is used to enter a port number for * Default: 631
IPP printing.
Normally, "631" is set.
08-1081 IPP Printer Name Maximum 127 letters
This code is used to enter a name of the IPP
printer.
08-1082 IPP Printer Location Maximum 127 letters
This code is used to enter a location to e.g. If the equipment is installed Room 123
install the equipment. on the second floor in Building A, enter "A-
2F-Room No. 123."
08-1083 IPP Printer Information Maximum 127 letters
This code is used to enter any information
regarding the equipment.
08-1084 IPP Printer Information (More) Maximum 127 letters
This code is used to enter the URL of the * Default:
website, where further information regarding http://www.e-studioseries.com/
the equipment is introduced.
08-1085 Installer of IPP Printer Driver Maximum 127 letters
IPP is capable of automatically installing the
printer driver, when a URL of a location
where the printer driver installer is retrieved
is entered. But the equipment does not sup-
port this function.
08-1086 IPP Printer "Make and Model" Maximum 127 letters
This code is used to enter a manufacturer * Default: TOSHIBA Corporation
name of the equipment.
08-1087 IPP Printer Information (More) MFGR Maximum 127 letters
This code is used to enter a URL of the web- * Default:
site, where further information regarding a http://www.e-studioseries.com/
manufacturer of the equipment is intro-
duced.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 160
Code Description Set value
08-1088 IPP Message from Operator Maximum 127 letters
This code is used to enter messages that an
operator or system administrator generates
in order to indicate the printer information or
status.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to permit a user to perform IPP printing.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 161
08-1093 to 1096

NetWare Print

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to permit a user to perform Novell printing.

Description

Code Description Set value


08-1093 Login Name to Novell Print Server Maximum 47 letters
This code is used to enter a print server name cre-
ated on the NetWare file server.
08-1094 Login Password to Novell Print Server Maximum 31 letters
This code is used to enter a login password speci-
fied on the print server, when necessary.
08-1095 Name of Search Root Server Maximum 31 letters
This code is used to enter a name of the NetWare
file server.
08-1096 Scan Rate Setting of Print Queue Acceptable values: 1 to 255 (1 to 255
seconds)
* Default: 5 (seconds)

Setting Timing
Use these codes to permit a user to perform Novell printing.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 162
08-1114

Text Transmission of Internet FAX

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to permit the transmission of text, when a fax is transmitted
through the Internet from the equipment.
There are two types of text transmitted, information, which equipment provides such as dates and page
numbers, and text, which a user enters on the control panel.
3
Description
When this code is used, whether or not to permit the transmission of text is reset, when a fax is trans-
mitted through the Internet.

0: Invalid (Does not transmit text)


1: Valid (Transmits text)
* 1: Valid (Transmits text)

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to disable the transmission of text, when a fax is transmitted
through the Internet.

Caution
If Invalid is set, information such as dates and page numbers, which the equipment provides auto-
matically, is not transmitted.
Even if "0" (Invalid) is set, a user can enter text on the control panel. However, this text is not trans-
mitted.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 163
08-1123

NT Domain ON/OFF Setting

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
To participate in a Windows NT network domain or the Windows Server 2000/2003 Active Directory, the
NT domain needs to be enabled. However, only the workgroup is supported for the time being.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable the NT domain is reset.
Turn the main switch of the equipment ON and start Samba to allow the equipment to participate in the
workgroup.

3: NT domain ON (Domain selected)


* Workgroup enabled (The domain setting is disabled for the time being.)

4: NT domain OFF (Workgroup selected)


* Workgroup enabled

* Default: 4

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to participate in a Windows NT network domain or Windows
Server 2000/2003 Active Directory.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 164
08-1124

Workgroup Name

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify a name of the workgroup, which the equipment belongs to, in order to be a
member of the group present on the Windows network.

Description
3
This code is used to enter a name of the workgroup.
Turn the main switch of the equipment ON and start Samba to allow the equipment to be a member of
the specified workgroup.

Set value = Name of workgroup

Up to 15 characters (ASCII)
* Default: workgroup

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to specify a name of the workgroup, which the equipment
belongs to, in order to be a member of the group present on the Windows network.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 165
08-1141

Display of MAC Address

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to display the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the equipment.

Description
When this code is used, the MAC address is displayed.

e.g.
**:**:**:**:**:**
6-byte data is divided into colon-delimited 2-byte blocks.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the MAC address.

Caution
Make sure that the MAC address has been correctly registered, if the Network Printer Kit is replaced,
and then the serial number of the equipment is entered.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 166
08-1144

Processing in the event of Memory Full Error

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the method of processing data (pages), which have been scanned, if the
amount of data exceeds the memory capacity during the scan operation.
3
Description
When this code is used, the method of processing pages, which have been scanned, is reset, in the
event of a memory full error.

0: Transfers scanned pages


1: Deletes scanned pages
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the method in order to delete data, which have been
scanned, in the event of a memory full error.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 167
08-1149

Enhanced Bold for PCL6

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to make bold text much thicker, when PCL6 is used to print.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to make bold text much thicker is reset.

0: OFF
1: ON
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code, if bold text is not sufficiently printed in bold type.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 168
08-1372

Heater and Energizing Time Accumulating Counter Display / 0 Cleaning

Purpose
This code is used to count up the heater control time (accumulated time at power-on of the equipment)
but not in sleep mode. If "0" is set, the counter is reset.

Description
When this code is used, the heater control time (accumulated time at power-on of the equipment) is
shown up to an 8-digit numeric value. Set "0" to reset the counter.
3
0 to 99999999 (hours)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
To display the heater control time (accumulated time at power-on of the equipment).
To reset the counter to "0."

Caution
If 0 is set, 0 is also automatically set for codes 08-1378/1380/1382.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 169
08-1378

Fuser Roller Ready Temperature Time Accumulating Counter / 0 Cleaning

Purpose
This code is used to count up the heater control time (accumulated time in the ready state). If "0" is set,
the counter is reset.

Description
When this code is used, the heater control time (accumulated time in the ready state) is shown up to an
8-digit numeric value. Set "0" to reset the counter.

0 to 99999999 (1 count = 2 sec.)


* Default: 0

Setting Timing
To display the heater control time (accumulated time in the ready state).
To reset the counter to "0."

Caution
If 0 is set, 0 is also automatically set for codes 08-1372/1380/1382.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 170
08-1380

Fuser Roller Printing Temperature Time Accumulating Counter / 0


Cleaning

Purpose
This code is used to count up the heater control time (accumulated time during printing). If "0" is set, the
counter is reset.

Description
When this code is used, the heater control time (accumulated time during printing) is shown up to an 8-
digit numeric value. Set "0" to reset the counter. 3
0 to 99999999 (1 count = 2 sec.)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
To display the heater control time (accumulated time during printing).
To reset the counter to "0."

Caution
If 0 is set, 0 is also automatically set for codes 08-1372/1378/1382.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 171
08-1382

Fuser Roller Energy Saving Temperature Time Accumulating Counter


Display / 0 Clearing

Purpose
This code is used to count up the heater control time (accumulated time in energy saver mode). If "0" is
set, the counter is reset.

Description
When this code is used, the heater control time (accumulated time in energy saver mode) is shown up
to an 8-digit numeric value. Set "0" to reset the counter.

0 to 99999999 (1 count = 2 sec.)


* Default: 0

Setting Timing
To display the heater control time (accumulated time in energy saver mode).
To reset the counter to "0."

Caution
If 0 is set, 0 is also automatically set for codes 08-1372/1378/1380.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 172
08-1385/1386/1388

Fuser Roller Paper Type Output Page Number Counter / 0 Cleaning

Purpose
These codes are used to count up the number of output pages by paper type at power-on of the regis-
tration sensor. If "0" is set, the counter is reset.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
08-1385 Thick paper 1 mode, copy counts
08-1386 Thick paper 2 mode, copy counts
3
08-1388 Transparency film mode, copy counts

Description
When these codes are used, the number of output pages by paper type is shown up to an 8-digit
numeric value. Set "0" to reset the counter.

0 to 99999999 (pages)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
To display the accumulated number of output pages by paper type.
To reset the counter to "0."

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 173
08-1410

Toner Cartridge Driving Time Counter

Purpose
This code is used to display the toner cartridge driving time accumulated after a toner cartridge is sup-
plied.

Description
When this code is used, the toner cartridge driving time is shown up to an 8-digit numeric value.

The display is updated as follows:


* The counter value stored in the IC chip on the toner cartridge board is read and updated at power
ON or when the front cover is closed.
* The driving time is calculated and updated when a toner cartridge is driven through printing.
(Data is written into the IC chip when printing is completed.)

0 to 99999999 (1 count = 1 sec.)


* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to display the current toner cartridge driving time.

Caution
The counter value is stored in the IC chip on the toner cartridge board. The counter value g0h has been
written into the IC chip for a new toner cartridge; therefore, it is not necessary to use this code to reset
the counter value to g0,h after replacing a toner cartridge.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 174
08-1428

Forcible SRAM Backup Data All Clearing

Purpose
This code is used to clear all remaining data on the SRAM.
This code is performed in order to prevent data leak when the MAIN board is disposed of.

Description
When this code is used, all remaining data on the SRAM is cleared.

Setting Timing 3
Use this code to dispose of the MAIN board (to replace the broken MAIN board, or to dispose of the
equipment).

Caution
When this code is performed, the equipment cannot be started up unless the MAIN board is
replaced. Therefore, never perform this code other than when disposing of the MAIN board.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 175
08-1440

IP Conflict Detect

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to initialize and take over network-related settings during the
update.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable initialization and takeover of network-related settings
is reset.

0: Valid
1: Invalid
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to forcibly operate the network printer controller, even if an IP collision occurs when ARP
is used.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 176
08-1447

IPP admin Name

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to display the name of the user who has the authority to control all IPP jobs.

Description
When this code is used, the name of the user who has the authority to control IPP jobs is displayed. 3
Setting Timing
Use this code to check the name of the user who has the authority to control IPP jobs.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 177
08-1448

IPP admin Password

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to display the user password for the authority to control all IPP jobs.

Description
When this code is used, the user password for the authority to control IPP jobs is displayed.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the user password for the authority to control IPP.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 178
08-1449

IPP authentication method

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to perform authentication, and also the method to perform
authentication, when the IPP port is created.

Description
3
When this code is used, the method to perform authentication is reset when the IPP port is created.

1: Disabled
2: Basic
3: Digest
4: Basic Digest
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to create the IPP port on the PC.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 179
08-1450

User name for IPP authentication

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to display the user name to perform authentication, when the IPP port is created on
the client.

Description
When this code is used, the user name to perform authentication is displayed when the IPP port is cre-
ated on the client.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the user name to perform authentication, when the IPP port is created on the cli-
ent.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 180
08-1451

Password for IPP authentication

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to display the user password to perform authentication, when the IPP port is created
on the client.

Description
3
When this code is used, the user password to perform authentication is displayed when the IPP port is
created on the client.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the user password to perform authentication, when the IPP port is created on
the client.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 181
08-1628

Drum Life Correction Switching of the Drum Reverse/Forward Rotation


Amount

Purpose
This code is used to additionally correct the amount of reverse and forward rotation of the drum during
cleaning, when a certain amount or more of paper is fed, to thoroughly clean the drum, even if poor
quality paper, which generates a large amount of paper dust, is used.
If the drum is rotated too much in reverse when the drum or recovery blade is in the initial state (standby
position), the recovery blade is more likely to curl up. Therefore, apply an additional correction, only if a
certain amount or more of paper is fed. As the amount of reverse rotation is larger, toner is more likely
to spill from the drum cleaner. The drum is rotated in reverse and forward with the same amount of rota-
tion, and then stops.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Sub code Applied to
08-1628 0 Drum life correction of the reverse rotation amount
1 Drum life correction of the forward rotation amount

Description
When this code is used, the amount of additional correction for the amount of rotation of the drum dur-
ing cleaning is adjusted.

Set value x 10m sec. = Drum rotation time

0: Not corrected
1 to 15: Corrected (10 to 150m sec.: approx. 0.9 to 13.5 mm)
* Default: 08-1628-0: 4, 08-1628-1: 9

* The correction distance is not constant due to the driving rattle or error when the motor starts up, to
switch the rotation direction of the main motor.

Setting Timing
If toner spills from the drum cleaner. (Set a smaller value.)
If the main motor is replaced with a different type of main motor.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.
Change the amount of both reverse and forward rotation, to change this set value. If the amount of
forward rotation is larger than that of reverse rotation, an unusual noise may occur. Therefore, never
make the amount of forward rotation larger than that of reverse rotation.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 182
08-1882

Initialization of the Scan Memory Area

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to initialize the memory area storing scanned-in data.

Description
3
When this code is used, the area storing scanned-in data is initialized.

Setting Timing
Use this code to initialize the area storing scanned-in data for some reason.

Caution
If this code is used to initialize the memory area, all scanned-in data is cleared.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 183
08-1913

Function Clear LED Flashing

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to flash the reset light, if the copy function setting is different
from the default after the copy operation ends. The reset light flashes until the specified function is
cleared (the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed or the auto-clear function starts up).

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to flash the reset light is reset after the copy operation ends.

0: Invalid (Always OFF)


1: Valid
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to stop the reset light flashing.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 184
08-1952 to 1955

Controller ROM / Scanner ROM Program Version Display

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
The FROM (flash ROM), which is mounted on the Network Printer Kit control board, contains the con-
troller ROM, which is used for controlling the Network Printer Controller. The CF (Compact Flash) for
the Scanner Upgrade Kit contains the scan ROM for controlling the Scanner Upgrade Kit. These codes
are used to display and check the versions of these data.
3
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
08-1952 Controller ROM program version display
08-1953 Scanner ROM program version display
08-1954 Controller ROM internal program version display
08-1955 Scanner ROM internal program version display

Description
When these codes are used, the versions of the data stored in each memory are shown as follows:

08-1952:
Program version: T282CN0XXXX
* X: Version

08-1953:
Program version: T282SC0XXXX
* X: Version

08-1954/1955:
Internal program version: VTCXX.YYYZ.
* X: Major version, Y: Minor version
Z: Language code (EUR: E, JPN: J, UC: U)

* Descriptions for codes 08-1954 and 08-1955 are the same.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check the version of the programs stored in each memory, after updating the con-
troller ROM or scan ROM.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 185
08-1960 to 1979

IP Address Range for IP Filter

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to accept only the print jobs within the IP address range specified for printing.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code Applied to
08-1960 IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 1)
08-1961 IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 1)
08-1962 IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 2)
08-1963 IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 2)
08-1964 IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 3)
08-1965 IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 3)
08-1966 IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 4)
08-1967 IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 4)
08-1968 IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 5)
08-1969 IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 5)
08-1970 IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 6)
08-1971 IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 6)
08-1972 IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 7)
08-1973 IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 7)
08-1974 IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 8)
08-1975 IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 8)
08-1976 IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 9)
08-1977 IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 9)
08-1978 IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 10)
08-1979 IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 10)

Description
When these codes are used, each minimum IP address and each maximum IP address of ten areas
are entered.

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
* Default: 000.000.000.000

Setting Timing
Use these codes to limit the users who can use the print function according to the IP address.

Caution
If 0.0.0.0 is entered in both ranges of the paired minimum area and maximum area, this function is
disabled.
This function does not affect Samba printing and Point & Print.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 186
08-1989

Enabling Server's IP Address acquired by DHCP


The Domain Name Server Option (6)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the domain name
server under the environment where the DHCP server is used.
3
Description
When this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the domain name server
is reset under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
The condition where the domain name server option (6) is set for the DHCP server under the environ-
ment where the DHCP server is used is provided. Use this code to set Enabled to acquire the address
from the DHCP server.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 187
08-1990

Enabling Server's IP Address acquired by DHCP


The NetBIOS over TCP/IP Name Server Option (44) = Primary and
Secondary WINS Name

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the WINS (Windows
Internet name service) under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the WINS is reset under
the environment where the DHCP server is used.

1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
he condition where the WINS server option (44) is set for the DHCP server under the environment
where the DHCP server is used is provided. Use this code to set Enabled to acquire the address from
the DHCP server.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 188
08-1991

Enable Serverfs IP Address acquired by DHCP


The Host Name Vender Extension Option (12)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the Host Name of the equipment
under the environment where the DHCP server is used.
3
Description
When this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the Host Name of the equipment from
the DHCP server is reset.

1: Enabled (Automatically acquires)


2: Disabled (Does not automatically acquire)
* Default: 2

Setting Timing
Use this code to manage the Host Name of the equipment in the DHCP server.

Caution
Currently, no unique Host Name can be set in Windows 2000 and Windows Server 2003. Therefore, it
is recommended to ignore this code.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 189
08-1993

Enable Servers IP Address acquired by DHCP


The Simple Main Server Option (69) Simple Mail Server Address

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the SMTP server
under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the SMTP server from
the DHCP server is reset.

1: Enabled (Automatically acquires)


2: Disabled (Does not automatically acquire)
* Default: 2

Setting Timing
Use this code to acquire the address of the SMTP server from the DHCP server.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 190
08-1994

Enable Servers IP Address acquired by DHCP


The POP3 Server Option (70) Post Office Server Address

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the POP3 under the
environment where the DHCP server is used.
3
Description
When this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the POP3 is reset under
the environment where the DHCP server is used.

1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* Default: 2

Setting Timing
The condition where the POP3 server option (70) is set for the DHCP server under the environment
where the DHCP server is used is provided. Use this code to set Enabled to acquire the address from
the DHCP server.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 191
08-1996

Enable Servers IP Address acquired by DHCP


The SNTP Server Option (42) SNTP Server Address

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the SNTP under the
environment where the DHCP server is used.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the SNTP is reset under
the environment where the DHCP server is used.

1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* Default: 2

Setting Timing
The condition where the SNTP server option (42) is set for the DHCP server under the environment
where the DHCP server is used is provided. Use this code to set Enabled to acquire the address from
the DHCP server.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 192

Вам также может понравиться